all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.68 MiB | June 01 2015 / May 07 2015 | |||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.44 MiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.99 MiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 3.26 MiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.45 MiB | June 01 2015 / May 07 2015 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 1 | Internal Photos | 1016.05 KiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 2 | Internal Photos | 992.82 KiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 3 | Internal Photos | 1.20 MiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 4 | Internal Photos | 905.66 KiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 5 | Internal Photos | 1.07 MiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 6 | Internal Photos | 1.02 MiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos 7 | Internal Photos | 1.05 MiB | / October 09 2014 | |||
1 2 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 349.62 KiB | June 01 2015 / May 07 2015 | |||
1 2 | Antenna Spec | Operational Description | January 06 2015 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 01 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Block diagram | Block Diagram | January 06 2015 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 01 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 01 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | June 01 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | June 01 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Operational Description | Operational Description | January 06 2015 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Parts List | Parts List/Tune Up Info | January 06 2015 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Parts Location | Parts List/Tune Up Info | January 06 2015 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Schematics | Schematics | January 06 2015 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Test Report | June 01 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | June 01 2015 / May 07 2015 | ||||||
1 2 | Operational Description | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Schematics | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Operational Description 1 | Operational Description | March 14 2014 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Operational Description 2 | Operational Description | March 14 2014 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | March 14 2014 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | March 14 2014 |
1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.68 MiB | June 01 2015 / May 07 2015 |
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution L40SK2 L41SK2 L52SK2 LSK2 LSK2 Composition Touch, Composition Colour:
Radio Stand: 21.08.2013 Englisch: 11.2013 Artikel-Nr.: 142.5R6.RCT.20 1425R6RCT20 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution ment. NOTICE the next page. DANGER CAUTION WARNING Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation on the protection of the environ-
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to slight or se-
vere injuries if you do not observe the warn-
ing. Texts with this symbol indicate situations which could cause damage to the vehicle or ve-
hicle equipment if you do not observe the warning. er, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concern-
ing any term. Symbols like these refer you to warnings within the same section or on a given page. They draw your attention to possi-
ble risks of accident or injury and explain how they can be avoided. Cross reference to information about pos-
sible damage to your vehicle within the same section or on a given page. Description of symbols Refers to a section within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes that should always be observed. Indicates that the section is continued on Indicates the end of a section. Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible. Indicates a registered trademark. Howev-
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which will lead to fatal or severe in-
juries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Volkswagen AG works continuously to develop and further improve all models. Please understand that we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifications at any time. The data provided con-
cerning scope of delivery, appearance, perform-
ance, dimensions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and vehicle functions are all correct at the time of going to print. Some of the equipment described might not yet be available in a particular vehicle (information can be provided by your local Volkswagen dealership), and some equipment may not be available in certain countries. No legal com-
mitment may be inferred from the information, illus-
trations or descriptions in this manual. No part of this manual may be reprinted, repro-
duced or translated without the written permission of Volkswagen AG. All rights under the laws of copyright are expressly reserved by Volkswagen AG. Subject to alteration and amendment. Printed in Germany. Volkswagen AG 2013 This paper was bleached without the use of chlorine. FCC Compliance Statement [Level 4]
<North America>
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turn-ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution:
Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
<Canada>
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause Interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. PRODUCTSPECIFICATION MODEL L40SK2 L41SK2 L52SK2 L53SK2 L54SK2 Dimensions(mm) W Dimensions(mm) H Dimensions(mm) D 297.2 295.7 275.8 314.9 256.9 159 120.8 155.5 160.3 133.2 205.2 209.5 201.6 209.4 209.5 Weight(KG) 1.81 1.61 1.58 1.86 1.67 PowerRequirement 9V~18V 9V~18V 9V~18V 9V~18V 9V~18V PowerConsumption 20W*4CH 20W*4CH 20W*4CH 20W*4CH 20W*4CH Bluetooth Specification Standard Bluetooth Version 2.1 Frequency Range 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz Output Power (Max.)
+4 dBm Max. 3 2 3 6 7 Index . 45 Abbreviations . 44 Table of Contents About this manual . Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system . 30 Description of telephone control system . 34 Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound and volume settings . 42 Audio mode Radio mode . 12 Media mode . 20 Introduction Before using the unit for the first time . Safety information for the infotainment system . Overview of the control elements . General information on operating the unit . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Table of Contents 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 1425R6RCT20 1 of the equipment described might not be fitted in your vehicle. Your Volkswagen dealership can pro-
vide more information on this. All details provided in this manual correspond to the information available at the time of going to print and apply only to factory-fitted infotainment systems. Due to continuous technical improvement of the infotainment system and possible updates to the unit's software, the displays and functions on the infotainment system may differ from the details given in this manual. No claims may be derived from the differing details, illustrations or descrip-
tions. Please ensure that this manual is in the vehicle if you lend or sell the vehicle to someone else. About this manual An alphabetical index is included at the end of this manual. A list of abbreviations explains technical abbre-
viations and terms. Directions and positions (e.g. right, left, front, rear) are normally relative to the vehicle's direction of travel. Illustrations help with orientation and should be regarded as a general guide. In right-hand drive vehicles the controls may sometimes be different to those displayed in illus-
trations or described in the text. All equipment and models are described without indicating whether the equipment is optional or specific to the model type. This means that some CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 2 page 40. WARNING WARNING Introduction Safety information for the infotainment system Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Operating the infotainment sys-
tem can distract you from the road. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Setting the volume too high may damage your hearing. This also applies even if you are only exposed to high volumes for short periods. Before using the unit for the first time Before using the infotainment system for the first time, carry out the following steps. This will enable you to use the infotainment system safely and make full use of the functions it provides:
Observe safety notes page 3. Familiarise yourself with the controls for the infotainment system page 7. In the System setup, reset the infotainment system to its original condition (factory settings) Use suitable data storage devices for media mode page 20. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution External devices that are placed loose in the vehicle or not properly secured can be flung though the interior and cause injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. You should never position or attach an ex-
ternal device on a door, on the windscreen or above or near to the areas marked AIRBAG on the steering wheel, the dash panel and the seat backrests, or between these areas and the vehicle occupants. External devices can cause serious injury in an accident, especial-
ly when the airbags deploy. The volume level may suddenly change when you switch audio source or connect a new audio source. Reduce the base volume before switching audio source or connecting a new audio source. The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. Opening the housing on a CD player can lead to injuries from invisible laser radiation. CD players should only be repaired by a qualified workshop. Connecting leads for external devices may obstruct the driver. Arrange the connecting leads so that they do not obstruct the driver. The infotainment system can be damaged by incorrect insertion of a storage device or inser-
tion of an incompatible storage device. Connecting, inserting or removing a storage device while the vehicle is in motion can dis-
tract you from the road and lead to accidents. WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 3 NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE (Continued) NOTICE (Continued) Only clean 12 cm standard CDs should be used. The vehicle loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound is distor-
ted. The CD drive can be damaged by any foreign objects attached to a storage device, and by ir-
regularly shaped storage devices. Do not affix stickers or other items to the data storage device. Stickers may peel off and damage the CD drive. Do not use printable data storage devi-
ces. Coatings and prints may peel off and damage the drive. Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-
larly shaped CDs or DVDs. Do not insert DVD Plus discs, dual discs or flip discs, as these are thicker than nor-
mal CDs. When inserting a memory card, ensure that it is correctly positioned page 20. Applying force may destroy the memory card slot's locking mechanism. Only use suitable memory cards. When inserting and removing a CD, always hold it flat and at a right angle to the front of the unit. Inserting or removing a CD at an angle to the drive can lead to scratching page 20. Inserting a second CD while a CD is already in the CD drive or being ejected can destroy the CD drive in the unit. Always wait until the CD is completely ejected!
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 4 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 5 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 11 7 7 8 8 9 10 Introduction is available from the local authorities. Due to country-specific legislation, certain functions cannot be selected on the screen Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle loudspeakers. when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information General information on operating the unit Not all listed function buttons and functions may be available due to the device software used in your market. The equipment is not faulty if a function button is missing from the screen. In some vehicles equipped with ParkPilot, the volume of the current audio source is auto-
matically lowered when reverse gear is engaged. Volume reduction can be set in the Sound setup menupage 42. Changes to settings may cause the display content to vary and some aspects of the infotainment sys-
tem operation to differ from the descriptions given in this manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons . Switching on and off . Adjusting base volume . Operating function buttons and displays on the screen . Selecting list entries and browsing lists . Input windows with on-screen keypad . Additional display information and display options . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Infotainment buttons This manual uses a button symbol with blue con-
tent and the term infotainment button to refer to buttons on the infotainment system, e.g. the info-
tainment button MEDIA . Infotainment buttons are operated either by press-
ing them or by pressing and holding. Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons information on page 7. After switching on, the system starts at the last se-
lected volume setting, provided that this does not exceed the preselected maximum switch-on vol-
ume page 42, Sound and volume settings. Depending on the unit version and the country, the infotainment system may switch off automatically when the engine is switched off or the vehicle key Rotary/push knobs The left-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 is re-
ferred to as the volume control or the on/off switch. The right-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 4 is re-
ferred to as the setting knob. Switching on and off information on page 7. To switch the infotainment system on or off man-
ually, briefly press the rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 . Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly touch-
ing the touchscreen is sufficient to operate First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory the infotainment system. Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 7 other vehicle. switching the infotainment system back on. on page 3 and the introductory information The infotainment system is permanently linked to the vehicle. It cannot be used in an-
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected, the ignition must be switched on before First read and observe the safety warnings on page 7. Adjusting base volume Any media source currently being played is stop-
ped while the infotainment system is muted. ap-
pears on the display. is removed from the ignition lock. If the infotain-
ment system is switched on again, it will switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes
(switch-off delay). Function: action Increasing the volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 clockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel Booklet Owner's manual. Decreasing volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anticlockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Changes to the base volume are indicated by a bar on the screen. During this time the infotain-
ment system cannot be operated. It is possible to preset certain volume settings and adjustments page 42. Muting the infotainment system Turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anti-
clockwise until is displayed. OR: press the MUTE infotainment system but-
ton1) Fig. 1 2 . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Operating function buttons and displays on the screen duce the volume again before switching to another audio source. If the base volume has been considerably in-
creased to play a certain audio source, re-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour 1) Depending on the unit version. 8 B A C OK
...
+ / -
... / ... Selecting list entries and browsing lists Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be selected. Overview of displays and function buttons Displays and function buttons: action and effect In the title bar, the currently selected menu and any other possible function buttons are displayed. Touch to open a further menu. Move the crosshair across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. OR: touch the desired position on the screen, the crosshair moves to this position. Touch to move up one level at a time from certain lists. Touch to move up one level at a time to the main menu from a submenu or to undo in-
puts made. Touch to open a pop-up window (option window), displaying further setting options. Some functions or displays are marked with a checkbox and are activated or deacti-
vated by touching this box. Touch to confirm an input or selection. Touch to close a pop-up window or an input window. Touch to change settings incrementally. Move the slider across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Browsing lists (scrolling) If there are more items available in a list view than can be displayed on the screen, function buttons for scrolling or a scroll bar are displayed on the right of the screen Fig. 3. Browsing lists line-by-line: touch the or function button briefly. Browsing lists page-by-page: briefly touch the screen above or below the scroll marker. Browsing long lists quickly page-by-page: touch and hold the screen above or below the scroll marker. To quickly scan through a long list, place your finger on the scroll marker and move it over the screen without losing contact. Lift your finger off the screen when you reach the desired position. List entries can be opened by touching them di-
rectly on the screen or by using the setting knob Fig. 1 4 . Marking and selecting list entries with the setting knob Turn the setting knob to mark each consecutive list entry with a selection box so you can browse through the list. Press the setting knob to select the marked list entry. Fig. 3 List entries settings menu information on page 7. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 9 Input windows with on-screen keypad First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 4 Input window with on-screen keyboard information on page 7. Input windows with on-screen keyboard allow you to enter text, such as an entry name for storing a destination or a search term for searching in long lists. Not all of the function buttons listed here are avail-
able in all countries and for all topics. Subsequent chapters only explain those functions that differ from the general view described here. Overview of function buttons Function buttons: action and effect The input line with the cursor is located on the left in the top line of the screen *. All inputs are dis-
played here. Input windows for free text input An input window for free text entry allows any let-
ter, number and special character to be entered in any combination. Touching the OK function button applies the se-
quence of characters currently displayed in the window. Input windows for selecting a stored entry It is only possible to select a sequence of letters, numbers and special characters that matches a stored entry. Every time a character is entered, a destination corresponding to the specifications is proposed in the input line. When terms are made up of more than one word, the space must be entered as well. If fewer than 99 entries are available, the number of remaining entries is displayed after the input line Fig. 4 2 . Touching this function button displays a list of these remaining entries. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Press and hold to open a pop-up window with special characters based on the letter shown. Touch the desired character to enter it. Some special characters can also be written out
(e.g. AE for ). Touch to switch between upper and lower case. Touch to enter a space. Touch to accept the suggestion in the input line and close the input window. Touch to delete characters in the input line from right to left. Press and hold to delete several characters at once. Touch to close the input window. 123... : touch to open the input window for numbers and special characters. ABC... : touch to go back to the input window for letters. Displays the number and opens the list of entries corresponding to the specifications that are still available. Letters/numbers Touch to insert the character in the input line. Composition Touch, Composition Colour Letters and OK 10 1 2 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory The displays that appear on the screen can vary depending on the settings, and may differ from those described here. Displays such as the current time and the current outside temperature can be displayed on the screen in the status bar. All displays appear only after the infotainment sys-
tem has completed start-up. Additional display information and display options information on page 7. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 11 with a window aerial. 12 13 14 14 16 16 17 17 18 Introduction RADIO main menu Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehicles Multi-storey car parks, tunnels, high buildings and mountains can impair radio reception. Audio mode Radio mode Basic information on use page 7 Menu and system settings (SETUP) page 40 Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
RADIO main menu . RDS radio data service . Station buttons . Selecting, setting and storing stations . Scan function (SCAN) . Radio text . TP function (traffic program) . Incoming traffic announcement . FM/AM settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Changes the displayed station button group by touching the function button. Opens the list of currently receivable radio stations page 14. Opens the frequency dial for the selected frequency band page 15. Opens the settings menu for the currently activated frequency band (FM or AM) page 18. Function buttons in the RADIO main menu Function button: effect 1 Selecting the frequency band Select the required frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Fig. 5 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 6 Radio mode station list 12
< / >
Function button: effect a) Varies by country and unit version. SCAN 1... to 12... RDS radio data service A RDS offa) TP No TP Possible displays and symbols Display: meaning Browses through the available or stored stations. Setting for the arrow buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on page 16. Station buttons for storing stations page 14. Updates the station list (AM frequency band) page 15. Displays station frequency or station name, and also possibly radio text. Station name and radio text are only displayed when RDS is available and activated page 13. The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 18. TP traffic news is activated and can be received page 17. No traffic news station can be received. The radio station is stored to a station button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Station name and automatic station tracking If RDS is available, station names can be dis-
played in the RADIO main menu and in the FM station list. FM radio stations may occasionally or continuously broadcast different content on different regional frequencies under the same station name (e.g. Ra-
dio 2). By default, automatic station tracking always switches to the currently selected station's frequen-
cy that offers the best reception, as the vehicle travels from one area to the next. As a result, you may lose the regional programme you are listening to. Automatic frequency changing and automatic sta-
tion tracking can be deactivated in the FM setup page 18. RDS (radio data system) is a radio data service which enables additional FM services, such as the display of station names, automatic station track-
ing, radio text and TP traffic news (TP). RDS is not supported by all units and is not availa-
ble everywhere or on every FM radio station. RDS can be deactivated in some country and unit versions page 18. Without RDS it is not possible to use radio data services. Fig. 7 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 8 Radio mode station list Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 13 Fig. 9 RADIO main menu Changing station button group Station buttons Selecting stations via the station buttons information on page 12. The radio stations are responsible for the content of the information sent. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory In the RADIO main menu, you can store stations from the currently selected frequency band on 12 consecutively numbered function buttons. These function buttons are called station buttons. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch the station button that shows the required station. When a stored station is selected via the station buttons, it will only be played if it can be received at your current location. Touch the Fig. 9 1 function button. The station buttons are displayed in groups of four function buttons
( 1 ... to 4 ... , 5 ... to 8 ... and 9 ... to 12 ... ). If radio text is shown instead of the station buttons, touch radio text in order to show the station buttons. See Storing stations page 15. Selecting, setting and storing stations Storing stations to station but-
tons Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 11 Radio mode station list Fig. 10 RADIO main menu Displaying station buttons 14 Updating the station list Displaying the frequency dial on page 3 and the introductory information Adjusting the frequency in stages Tuning to a station frequency manually Selecting stations from a station list Selecting stations Selecting stations using arrow buttons
< / >
First read and observe the safety warnings on page 12. Touch the < or > Fig. 10 function button. The unit only switches to stored or receivable stations, depending on what settings have been made for the arrow buttons. Setting for the ar-
row buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Search through the list and touch the required station to select it. To close the station list, touch the Fig. 11 function button. In the FM frequency band the station list is updated automatically. In the AM frequency band, touch the Fig. 11 function button to up-
date the station list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Turn the setting knob one stop further. OR: touch the Fig. 10 function button. Turn the setting knob. OR: touch the arrow buttons to the left or the right of the frequency band. Touch one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. The next receivable station is set automatically. OR: press and hold one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. When you release the button, the unit automatically tunes to the next available station. OR: place your finger on the slider in the frequency dial and drag it along the dial. Briefly press the setting knob. Manual frequency selection is also closed if you select a station with a station button. The frequency band closes automatically after a period of inactivity. Press and hold the desired station button Fig. 10 until a tone is soun-
ded. The station currently playing is then stored on that station button. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Stations already stored on a station button are marked in the station list with the Fig. 11 symbol. Select the desired station by pressing and holding on the screen. Touch the button to which you wish this station to be assigned. A signal tone sounds, and the station is then stored on this station but-
ton. Repeat the process to store further stations from the station list. All stored stations can be deleted individually or together in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Storing a station from the station list to a station button Storing the current station to a station button Quickly browsing through the frequency band Hiding the frequency band Deleting stored stations Storing stations Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 15 Starting the scan function Stopping the scan function First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Scan function (SCAN) information on page 12. When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current frequency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each. SCAN appears on the display. Fixed station names are indicated by a dot to each side of the name. The fixed text is adopted for all the station buttons on which the corresponding station is stored. Stopping station names scrolling (FM frequency) Some radio stations transmit a very long station name, which is shown on the screen as a scrolling text. To fix the text that is currently displayed to the screen, touch the station name and hold until a tone is sounded. Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the function button and then select SCAN . Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the SCAN function button to end the scan function at the station arrived at. Manually selecting a station with the station buttons also stops the scan function. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch displayed radio text Fig. 12. Touch displayed radio text Fig. 13. In the FM setup menu, deactivate the Radio text function button by touch-
ing it page 18. Fig. 12 RADIO main menu information on page 12. Hiding station buttons Displaying station buttons Switching off radio text per-
manently The station buttons can be hidden to enlarge the display area for the radio text Fig. 13. Some RDS-compatible stations also broadcast ad-
ditional text information known as radio text. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 13 Radio mode: radio text is visible Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio text 16 Fig. 15 Radio mode: station list with TP display TP function (traffic program) First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 14 RADIO main menu with TP display information on page 12. In FM mode, the selected station must support the TP function. After the TP function is switched on, if you change via the station buttons or manual se-
lection to a station that does not support the TP function, traffic news monitoring will not be possi-
ble (display: No TP). If the currently selected traffic news station can no longer be received, No TP is also displayed and you will have to start a manual station search page 14. In AM mode or media mode, the unit will always automatically tune to a traffic news station in the background, provided that a TP station is availa-
ble. This procedure may take some time. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic news monitoring with the TP function is only possible if a traffic news station is available. Traffic news stations are indicated in the RADIO main menu and in the station list by TP Fig. 14 and Fig. 15. Some stations that do not broadcast their own traf-
fic news support the TP function through a link to a traffic news station (EON). Switching the TP function on and off In the FM/AM setup menu, activate or deac-
tivate the Traffic program (TP) function button by touching it page 18. If the station that is currently selected does not support the TP function, No TP will be shown in the top right of the screen. Activated TP function and station selection While traffic news monitoring is on, TP is displayed at the top right in audio mode Fig. 14. Traffic an-
nouncements broadcast by the current station or a linked traffic news station will interrupt the current audio mode. During the traffic announcement a pop-up window is displayed and, if required, the radio is switched to the traffic news station (EON) for the duration of the traffic announcement. The media mode is paused and the volume is ad-
justed to the preset level page 42. Incoming traffic announcement information on page 12. Incoming traffic announcements will interrupt the active audio mode. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 17 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory FM/AM settings information on page 12. The traffic announcement volume setting can be adjusted with the volume control Fig. 1 1 . The adjusted volume setting will be applied to sub-
sequent announcements. FM setup Select the FM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the FM setup menu. Touch the Cancel function button to end the traffic announcement. The TP function remains ac-
tivated. OR: touch the Deactivate function button to end the current traffic announcement and permanently switch off the TP function. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 17. Radio text : radio text is activated page 16. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Radio Data System (RDS) a): the radio data system (RDS) is deactivated page 13. If the checkbox is deactivated, the traffic program (TP) and radio text functions are not available. Alternative frequency (AF) : automatic station tracking is activated. If the checkbox is deactiva-
ted, automatic station tracking is switched off. The RDS Regional function button is then inac-
tive (greyed out). Fixed : the unit only switches to alternative frequencies for the selected station that broadcast the same regional service. Automatic : the unit always switches to the station's frequency that currently offers the best reception. As a result, regional programmes may be interrupted. a) Varies by country and unit version. AM setup Select the AM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the AM setup menu. All : all stored stations will be deleted (FM 1, FM 2, FM 3). To delete individual stations, selected the desired preset list FM 1 , FM 2 or FM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. RDS Regional : defines the setting for automatic station tracking with RDS page 13. Advanced setup : settings for the RDS radio data services. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 18 All : all stored stations will be deleted (AM 1, AM 2, AM 3). To delete individual stations, select the desired preset list AM 1 , AM 2 or AM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 19 27 26 28 28 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 Introduction Media mode This product is subject to certain intellectual property rights and copyrights owned by the Media sources are audio sources containing au-
dio files on various different storage devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external MP3 player). These au-
Microsoft Corporation. The use or distribution of this type of technology outside this product re-
quires a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft company. dio files can be played by the infotainment system from its corresponding drives or audio input sock-
ets (internal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN socket etc.). Copyright Audio and video files stored on data storage devi-
ces are normally subject to national and interna-
tional copyright laws. Observe legal requirements. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Data storage device and file requirements . Playing order of files and folders . MEDIA main menu . Changing the media source . Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu . Selecting tracks from the track list . Inserting or ejecting a CD . Inserting or removing a memory card . External data storage device connected to USB port . External audio source connected to the AUX-
IN socket . Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth . Media settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Requirements for playing in the unit CD Digital Audio specification . MP3 files (.mp3) with bit rates of between 32 and 320 kbit/s or with variable bit rate. WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono/stereo without copy protec-
tion. Playlists in the formats PLS, M3U and WPL. Playlists no larger than 20 kB and containing no more than 1,000 entries. File name and path information not longer than 256 charac-
ters. Media source Audio CDs (up to 80 minutes). CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW audio data CDs up to max. 700 MB (mega-
bytes) with the file systems ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 SD and MMC memory cards with the file systems FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, VFAT or exFAT up to max. 2 GB (gigabytes), SDHC memory cards up to max. 32 GB and SDXC memory cards up to max. 2 TB (terabytes). Data storage device and file requirements information on page 20. Factory-fitted CD drives conform to safety class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/ VDE 0837. The infotainment system only accepts standard 12 cm CDs, and memory cards measuring 32 mm x 24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm. The supported file formats listed are collectively re-
ferred to below as audio files. A CD containing audio files of these types is referred to as an au-
dio data CD. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 20 Do not use memory card adapters. Audio file playback via Bluetootha). Media source AUX External audio source. Playing order of files and folders No liability can be accepted for damaged or lost files on the storage devices. Requirements for playing in the unit Playback of external audio sources via 3.5 mm jack plug page 27. The external media player must support the A2DP Blue-
tooth profile page 28. The reading time may vary considerably depend-
ing on the condition of the storage device (copying and deleting actions), folder structure and file type. Playlists only determine a certain playing order. There are no files stored in a playlist. The unit will not play a playlist if the files are not stored on the storage device at the locations referred to by the playlist (relative file paths). a) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Restrictions and notes Contamination, exposure to high temperatures and mechanical damage can render storage devices unusable. Please observe the manufacturer's in-
structions. Variations in the quality of storage devices from dif-
ferent manufacturers can lead to problems during playback. Please observe copyright laws. The unit may be unable to read individual tracks or the entire storage device due to the storage devi-
ce's configuration or the devices and programs used for recording. Information about the best ways to create audio files and configure storage devices (compression rate, ID3 tag etc.) can be found online. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio files on storage devices are often sorted by folders and playlists to determine a certain playing order. Tracks, folders and playlists on a storage device are each sorted by name in alphanumeric order. The illustration shows a typical audio data CD that contains tracks , folders and subfolders Fig. 16. The tracks are played in the following order1):
1. 2. Tracks 1 and 2 in the CD's root directory Tracks 3 and 4 in the first folder F1 in the CD's root directory Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of the folder F1 Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of the subfolder F1.1 Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of the folder F1 Tracks 8 and 9 in the second folder F2 The playing order can be altered by selecting different playback modes page 22. Fig. 16 Possible structure on an audio data CD information on page 20. 1) The Mix/Repeat including subfolders function must be activated page 40 in the Media setup menu. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 21 3. 4. 5. 6. MEDIA main menu the track selection menu page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Playlists are not played automatically. In-
stead they must be specifically selected via Function buttons in the MEDIA main menu Function button: effect Fig. 17 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. In the MEDIA main menu, various media sources can be selected and played. Press the MEDIA infotainment button to open the MEDIA main menu Fig. 17. Playback of the media source that was most re-
cently played resumes from the point where it stop-
ped. The media source currently playing is indicated at the bottom left in the function button 1 . The MEDIA main menu will indicate if no media source is available. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to select a different media source page 23. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : Bluetooth audio page 28. Opens the track list page 24. Changes track when in media mode page 24 Playback stops. The function button changes to page 24. Playback is resumed. The function button changes to page 24. Opens the Media setup menu page 28. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Composition Touch, Composition Colour
< / >
22 1 A SCAN Function button: effect Changing the media source Displays and symbols in the MEDIA main menu Display: meaning B RDS offa) TP No TP a) Varies by market and unit version. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on. To start the scan func-
tion, press setting knob Fig. 1 4 or open the track list and touch the SCAN function button. Display of track information (CD text , ID3 tag with MP3 files). Audio CDs: track and track number corresponding to the track order on the CD are dis-
played. Audio files: artist name, album name and track name are displayed. Track playing time and remaining playing time in minutes and seconds. The remaining playing time displayed may differ for audio files with variable bit rate (VBR). The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 12. TP is activated and can be received page 12. No traffic news station can be received. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In the MEDIA main menu, press the MEDIA in-
fotainment button as often as required to switch between the available media sources. OR: in the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 18 1 function button and select the desired media source. Media sources not currently available are shown as inactive (grey) in the pop-up window. If a media source that has already been played is selected again, playback is resumed from the point that was last reached. Audio or audio data CD in the internal CD drive page 25. Memory card page 26. External data storage device connected to USB page 26. External audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. Bluetooth audio page 28. Optionally selectable media sources Function button: media source CD SD card USB AUX BT audio Fig. 18 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. The media source can also be changed in the Track list view page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
on page 3 and the introductory ings Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 23 Briefly touch the function button > once. Briefly touch the function button < twice. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory You can browse through the tracks of the media source that is currently playing using the arrow but-
tons. You cannot switch to playback from a playlist us-
ing the arrow keys. Playback from a playlist must be started manually via the track selection menu page 24, Selecting tracks from the track list. Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Fig. 19 MEDIA main menu Controlling playback via the MEDIA main menu Effect Action Briefly touch the function button < once. Goes to the start of the current track. If the track is short-
er than 3 seconds, the system goes to the start of the previous track. Goes to the start of the previous track. Changes from the first track to the last track on the storage device that is being played. Goes to the next track. Changes from the last track to the first track on the storage device that is being played. Fast reverse. Fast forward. Playback stops. The function button changes to . Playback is resumed. The function button changes to
. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Opening the track list In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button Fig. 19 to open the track list. The track that is currently playing is highlighted Fig. 20. Search through the track list and touch the de-
sired track. If track information is available, the track name is displayed instead of Track + No.. Press and hold the < function button. Press and hold the > function button. Briefly touch the function button once. Briefly touch the function button once. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory information on page 20. Selecting tracks from the track list Fig. 20 Track list from a media source Composition Touch, Composition Colour 24 A SCAN Overview of function buttons in the track list Function button: effect Opens the Sources menu. Touch to select a different media source. Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to change the media source. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : external media player connected via Bluetooth page 28. Touch the function button to open the parent folder of the current folder on the media source. The name of the current folder will be displayed to the right of the symbol. Starts playback at the first track. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. Closes track list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The internal CD drive can play audio CDs and au-
dio data CDs. When an audio CD without CD text is playing, only TITLE and the track number, corresponding to the playing order on the data medium, are displayed in the centre line of the screen. If the audio file CDs played contain additional track information (CD text , ID3 tag for MP3 files), it can be displayed on the screen. Inserting a CD Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. Push the CD into the CD slot only to the point where it is drawn in automatically. When the CD is inserted, playback will start au-
tomatically. Ejecting a CD In some countries, the vehicle key must be in the ignition lock of a cabriolet vehicle in order to eject a CD (anti-theft protection). Press the EJECT infotainment button. The CD in the drive will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 10 seconds. For safety reasons, the CD will be drawn back into the player if it is not removed within roughly 10 seconds, but the unit will not switch to CD mode. CD cannot be read or is faulty A message will be shown on the screen if the data on an inserted CD cannot be read or the CD is faulty. Inserting or ejecting a CD information on page 20. Tracks, folders and playlists can also be marked by turning the setting knob then loa-
Uneven road surfaces and strong vibrations can cause playback to jump. First read and observe the safety warn-
on page 3 and the introductory ings ded or opened up or opened by pressing the knob. Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 25 Vertical card slot Horizontal card slot back of CDs is disabled. ery time, contact a qualified workshop. Inserting a memory card Fig. 1 7 When the temperature inside the infotain-
ment system is too high, loading and play-
First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. If you insert a number of different CDs and receive the message Error: CD drive ev-
Inserting or removing a memory card information on page 20. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the lettering facing left (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the label facing up (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution If a memory card cannot be inserted, ensure that it is positioned correctly and is compatible with the unit. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the memory card. Removing a memory card The inserted memory card must be prepared for removal. In the MEDIA main menu touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove the SD card safely function but-
ton. OR: touch the Remove safely function button and then select SD card . Removing The connected storage device must be prepared before removal. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove safely function button and then select USB . Data media cannot be read The message No playable files available appears if the data on the connected storage de-
vice cannot be read. Once the memory card has been ejected from the system, a message is shown on the screen and the function button is greyed out. The memory card can then be removed. Press the inserted memory card. The memory card springs out of the slot. Remove the memory card. Memory card cannot be read If you insert a memory card containing data that cannot be read, the unit will not change to memory card mode after loading. A corresponding message is displayed. In some countries and with some equipment lev-
els, the vehicle may be fitted with a USB connec-
tion in the stowage compartment in the centre console. Booklet Owner's Manual, chapter Prac-
tical equipment. Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the data storage device. External data storage device connected to USB port information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 26 Fig. 21 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external storage device. Fig. 22 External audio source connected to AUX-
IN External audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The AUX-IN socket Fig. 1 6 can only be used with a 3.5 mm jack plug. The connected external audio source is played over the vehicle speakers and cannot be control-
led via the infotainment system. AUX shows on the screen when an external audio source is connected Fig. 22. Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN socket Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Connect the external audio source to the AUX-
IN socket. Information on operating an external audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket Action Selecting another audio source on the infotainment system. Stopping playback on the external audio source. Disconnecting the plug from the AUX-IN socket. Effect The external audio source continues to run in the background. The infotainment system remains in the AUX menu. The infotainment system switches to playback of the most recently played audio source. Start playback on the external audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 21 1 function button and select AUX . The output volume of the external audio source should be adjusted to the volume of the other au-
dio sources page 42. Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external audio source. Interference may occur if the external audio source is powered from the vehicles 12-volt Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 socket. 27 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth Fig. 23 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Touch the Find devices function button to con-
nect an external Bluetooth audio source for the first time. OR: touch the Paired devices function button to select an external Bluetooth audio source from the list. Continue the process by following the prompts on the infotainment system screen and in the dis-
play on the Bluetooth audio source. You may then have to start playback on the Blue-
tooth audio source manually. When playback on the Bluetooth audio source is stopped, the infotainment system remains in Blue-
tooth audio mode. Controlling playback The extent to which the Bluetooth audio source can be controlled via the infotainment system var-
ies depending on what Bluetooth audio source is connected. With media players that support the AVRCP Blue-
tooth profile, playback on the Bluetooth audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched to Bluetooth audio mode or to a different audio source. In addition, track display or track change is possible via the in-
fotainment system. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In Bluetooth audio mode, audio files from a Blue-
tooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone) that is connected via Bluetooth can be played over the vehicle loudspeakers (Bluetooth audio playback). Conditions The Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth profile. The Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be activated in the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Starting Bluetooth audio transfer Switch on Bluetooth visibility on the external Bluetooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone). Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Press the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the Fig. 23 1 function button and se-
lect BT audio . Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : memory card is ejected from the system and can then be safely removed page 26. Sound : sound settings page 42. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. Due to the large number of possible Blue-
tooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all described functions. Media settings information on page 20. source, e.g. key tones on a mobile telephone, to prevent interference noise and malfunctions. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Always switch off the warning and service tones on a connected Bluetooth audio Composition Touch, Composition Colour 28 Function button: effect Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Mix/Repeat including subfolders : subfolders will be included in the selected playback mode page 22. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 29 32 33 31 31 31 WARNING WARNING (Continued) Introduction area where the network is very weak or, in some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-
pass. This also means that no emergency calls can be made. Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-
correctly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This can cause injuries. While the vehicle is in motion, always se-
cure the mobile telephone properly outside the airbag deployment area. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
General information . Areas where special regulations apply . Bluetooth . Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system . Switching telephone control system off . The telephone functions described in the following section can be controlled via the infotainment sys-
tem if a mobile telephone that is switched on is paired and connected with the infotainment sys-
tem. The mobile telephone must support the Blue-
tooth function otherwise a connection cannot be made between the telephone and the infotainment system. If a mobile telephone is not connected to the info-
tainment system, the telephone control system cannot be used. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Carrying a mobile telephone that is switched on just next to a pacemaker may cause the pacemaker to malfunction. Maintain a gap of approximately 20 centi-
metres between the aerials of the mobile tele-
phone and the pacemaker, as mobile tele-
phones may affect the functioning of pace-
makers. Do not carry a mobile telephone in your breast pocket above your pacemaker when the telephone is switched on or in standby mode. If you suspect interference, switch off the mobile telephone immediately. Making telephone calls and operating the tel-
ephone control system while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road and lead to accidents. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Your call may be cut off or you may be un-
able to make calls if you are in an area with no mobile telephone network coverage, an The centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements if raised, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. High speeds, poor weather and poor road con-
ditions as well as the network quality may im-
pair telephone calls in the vehicle. Composition Touch, Composition Colour WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE 30 is available from the local authorities. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on First read and observe the introductory on information and safety warnings There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information When connecting the telephone control sys-
tem with a device using Bluetooth, read the device's operating manual for detailed safety infor-
mation. Use compatible Bluetooth products only. General information page 30. Areas where special regulations apply page 30. You may experience poor reception or may be cut off in areas where the signal is weak. Most electronic devices are shielded against high-
frequency signals. In rare cases, however, elec-
tronic devices may not be shielded against high-
frequency signals emitted by the telephone control system. This can cause interference. How the individual telephone menus are displayed depends on the mobile telephone being used. There may be differences. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Vehicle care and maintenance. Use compatible Bluetooth devices only. Informa-
tion on compatible Bluetooth products is available from your Volkswagen dealership or online. Follow the operating manual for your mobile tele-
phone and the instructions provided by the acces-
sory manufacturer. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the mobile telephone and mobile tele-
phone provision in areas with a risk of explosion. These areas are often clearly marked, but not al-
ways clude, for example:
Areas immediately around chemical pipelines and tanks. Lower decks of ships and ferries. The area around vehicles which run on liquid gas (such as propane or butane). Places where there are chemicals or particles such as flour, dust and metal powder in the air. All other places where the vehicle engine must be switched off. Your mobile telephone must always be switch-
ed off in areas where special regulations apply and when the use of mobile telephones is for-
bidden. The radiation produced by the mobile telephone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is used to connect a mobile telephone to the telephone control system fitted in a vehicle. A pairing process has to be carried out before the telephone control system can be used with a Bluetooth mobile telephone. Switch off the mobile telephone in areas with a risk of explosion!
First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Bluetooth page 30. in Introduction on page 30. They in-
Telephone control (PHONE) WARNING NOTICE 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 31 Music playback Bluetooth Advanced Audio Dis-
tribution Profile (A2DP):
Bluetooth profile for the transmission of ster-
eo-quality audio signals. Playback controls Bluetooth Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile (AVRCP):
Bluetooth profile for displaying track informa-
tion and control of playback in the mobile device. Some Bluetooth mobile telephones are detected and connected automatically when the ignition is switched on, if a connection already exists. For this to happen, the mobile telephone itself and the Bluetooth function in the telephone must be switched on and all active Bluetooth connections to other units must be disconnected. The Bluetooth connection is free of charge. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG, Inc. Bluetooth profiles When a mobile telephone is connected to the tele-
phone control system, data is exchanged via one of the Bluetooth profiles. Basic telephony Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile
(HFP):
If a mobile telephone is connected via HFP to the telephone control system, you can make calls wirelessly via the hands-free system. The vehicle's exterior aerial cannot be used with this. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehi-
cle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Entries have to be made on the mobile telephone keypad during the pairing process. The mobile tel-
ephone has to be at hand for this. Starting mobile telephone pairing Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Find telephone function button. OR:
Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Setup function button. Touch the Select telephone function button and then Find telephone . Once the search process is complete, the names of all Bluetooth devices found will be displayed on the screen. Select the mobile telephone to be paired from this list of Bluetooth devices and then select Hands-free telephone (HFP). The infotainment system and the mobile telephone are now connected. Further input may be required on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system to conclude the connection process. In order to operate a mobile telephone via the info-
tainment system, a single pairing process is re-
quired for both devices. Pairing should only be performed when the vehicle is stationary. Conditions Ignition is switched on. If necessary, disconnect any headsets from the mobile telephone. The Bluetooth function must be activated or set to visible on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system. The keypad lock on the mobile telephone has to be unlocked. Follow the operating manual for the mobile tele-
phone. The Bluetooth function is set to visible on the infotainment system for about 3 minutes after the ignition is switched on. Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system page 30. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Composition Touch, Composition Colour 32 ternet at www.volkswagen.com. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on You will find further information on pairing and connecting mobile telephones on the In-
Switching telephone control system off page 30. Pairing and connecting mobile telephones Several mobile telephones can be paired with the infotainment system, but only one mobile tele-
phone can be connected to the infotainment sys-
tem at a time. When you switch the infotainment system on, a connection is automatically set up with the mobile telephone that was connected last. If no connec-
tion can be set up with this mobile telephone, the telephone control system automatically attempts to set up a connection with the next mobile telephone in the list of paired devices. Bluetooth connections have a maximum range of 10 metres. Any active Bluetooth connection is in-
terrupted when this distance is exceeded. The con-
nection is automatically restored as soon as the device enters the Bluetooth range. If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mobile telephone. Depends on the mobile telephone:
Enter the PIN code that is then displayed on the infotainment system into the mobile telephone and confirm it. OR:
Compare the PIN code displayed on the info-
tainment system with the PIN code displayed on the mobile telephone. If the PIN code matches, it has to be confirmed on both devices. The PHONE main menu is displayed and the tele-
phone book and the call lists stored in the mobile telephone are loaded automatically once pairing has been completed. The time taken by the load-
ing process varies depending on the amount of da-
ta stored in the mobile telephone. This data is available on the infotainment system once the loading process is completed. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the ignition. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. The telephone control system is switched off and any active call is transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The telephone control system is not switched off if the vehicle key is left in the ignition lock after the engine is switched off. Once a set time has ex-
pired, a message appears on the infotainment sys-
tem screen informing you that the telephone con-
trol system will be switched off automatically. An active call will be transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The transfer of an active call from the tele-
phone control system to the mobile telephone can take up to approximately 10 seconds (depend-
ing on the mobile telephone being used). Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 33 34 35 36 36 37 38 38 39 39 Introduction PHONE main menu Some networks might not support all lan-
guage-dependent characters and services. Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle speakers. Description of telephone control system Some functions and settings are only available when the vehicle is stationary, and are not suppor-
ted by all mobile telephones. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
PHONE main menu . During a telephone call . Entering a telephone number . Telephone book menu (Contacts) . Call lists menu . Speed dial buttons . Telephone settings . Bluetooth settings . User profile settings . Up to 20 devices can be linked to the telephone control system. One device at a time can be con-
nected via the hands-free profile (HFP) or audio playback profile (A2DP) page 33. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Introduction to and safety information for tel-
ephone control system page 30 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Fig. 25 Incoming call data via the User profile setup menu page 39. The telephone book will be automati-
cally updated when the telephone is connected again (e.g. on the next journey). A maximum of 4 user profiles can be stored for mobile telephones in the telephone control system. If another mobile telephone is connected, the user profile which has not been used for the longest amount of time will be deleted automatically. Telephone control function buttons Press the PHONE infotainment button to open the PHONE main menu. Fig. 24 PHONE main menu Assignment to a user profile Telephone book data, call lists and stored speed dial buttons are assigned to a user profile and stor-
ed in the telephone control system. They are avail-
able when the mobile phone is connected with the telephone control system again. If, while connected to the radio, telephone book entries on the mobile telephone are changed, you can start a manual update of the telephone book First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 34 2 1 B A Function button: effect During a telephone call Telephone control displays and symbols Display: meaning The name of the mobile telephone network provider where the inserted SIM card or the SIM card of the paired mobile telephone is registered. Displays the telephone number or the stored name. The charge level of the paired mobile telephone. The signal strength of the current mobile telephone transmitter station. Name of the paired mobile telephone or the user profile in use. Touch to connect or pair an-
other mobile telephone. Speed dial buttons which can be used to store one telephone number from the telephone book each page 38. Opens the keypad to enter a telephone number page 36. Opens the telephone book in the paired mobile telephone page 36. Opens the call lists in the paired mobile telephone page 37. Opens the Telephone setup menu page 38. Touch to accept a call. Touch to end a call. OR: touch to reject an incoming call. Touch to mute the ring tone during a call or to switch the mute off. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch to make the call on the mobile telephone provision. Touch to switch off the microphone in the mobile telephone provision during a call ( func-
tion button changes to ). The conversation in the vehicle cannot be heard at the other end. appears on the display A . Touch the function button to switch on the microphone in the mobile telephone provision again. Touch to end a call. When a connection is made to a dialled telephone number, the PHONE main menu changes to the telephone call view Fig. 26. Displays and function buttons: action and effect a) First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 26 During a telephone call Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 35 B A Displays and function buttons: action and effect Entering a telephone number a) This function button is only displayed when the call is made on the mobile telephone. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 27 Entering a telephone number Possible functions Entering a telephone num-
ber In the PHONE main menu, press the function button.
: call is being made with the connected mobile telephone. Touch the function button to make the call on the mobile telephone provision.
: the microphone in the provision for mobile telephone is switched off.
: charge level of the paired mobile telephone. Display of call duration and telephone number or the stored name. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Enter the telephone number on the keypad. Touch the function button to dial the number. Enter the first letters of the required contact on the keypad. Possible en-
tries appear in the contact list. Browse through the contact list and touch the desired contact to make the call. Fig. 28 Contacts menu First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone book menu (Contacts) Selecting a contact from a list Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 29 Search window 36 Call lists menu Finding a contact in the search window Selecting a contact from a list Availability of telephone book menu depends on the mobile telephone being used. The telephone book can also be opened during an on-going telephone call. In the PHONE main menu, press the function button. It may take a few minutes after the first pairing process until the telephone book data1) from the paired mobile telephone is available on the info-
tainment system. The process could take up to an hour, depending on the amount of data to be trans-
ferred. If necessary, confirm the transfer on the mobile telephone. Possible functions Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. OR: if several numbers are allocated to the same contact, first touch the contact and then the desired number to make the call. Touch the Fig. 28 function button to open the search window. Enter the name you are looking for in the search window Fig. 29. The number of matching results is displayed to the right of the entry field. Touch the function button to go to the list view. Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Meaning Missed calls : shows telephone numbers of missed and unanswered calls. Dialled numbers : shows telephone numbers that were dialled on the mobile telephone and the infotainment system telephone control system. Received calls : shows all telephone numbers that were received on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system via the telephone control system. In the PHONE main menu, press the func-
tion button. Touch the ... Fig. 30 1 function button. Select the desired call list: All , Missed calls , Dialled numbers or Received calls . If a telephone number is already stored in the tele-
phone book, the stored name is displayed in the call list instead of the telephone number. Fig. 30 Call list menu Possible displays in the call menu Display Availability of call lists depends on the mobile telephone being used. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. 1) Depending on what device is used, only contacts from the telephone memory may be loaded. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 37 Speed dial buttons Assigning speed dial but-
tons Editing assigned speed di-
al buttons Fig. 31 PHONE main menu Possible functions First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. One telephone number from the telephone book can be stored to each of the speed dial buttons Fig. 31 1 . All speed dial buttons must be assigned manually and are then specific to a user profile. In the PHONE main menu, touch a free speed dial button. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. In the PHONE main menu, press and hold an assigned speed dial button until the Contacts menu opens. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. To close the Contacts menu without applying changes, touch the func-
tion button. Any telephone number stored on a speed dial button can be deleted in the User profile setup menu page 39. In the PHONE main menu, briefly touch an assigned speed dial button to dial the telephone number stored to that button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Hands-free a): the hands-free function is activated. Touch the function button during a telephone call to make the call on the mobile telephone. Select telephone : select the mobile telephone from the list view to connect it to the infotainment system. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Contacts stored to the speed dial buttons are not updated automatically. If a contact stored to a speed dial button is modified on the mobile tel-
ephone, the speed dial button must be assigned again. Telephone settings Deleting assigned speed dial buttons Dialling with speed dial buttons In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Find telephone : touch to connect a new mobile telephone. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 38 First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then Bluetooth . Bluetooth settings Function button: effect Bluetooth : touch to switch Bluetooth off. All existing connections are ended. Visibility : switch Bluetooth visibility on and off. Visible : Bluetooth visibility is activated. Not visible : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated. The Bluetooth visibility has to be switched on before a Bluetooth device can be externally paired with the infotainment system. Upon start : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated approximately 3 minutes after the engine is star-
ted. Function button: effect User profile : opens the User profile setup menu page 39. Select ring tone b): select the ring tone from the list of preset ring tones. The selected ring tone is played and stored when you leave the submenu. a) This function button is only active during a telephone call. b) Either the selected ring tone or the ring tone set in the mobile phone is sounded, depending on what mobile phone is being used. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Manage favourites : to edit speed dial buttons. Sort by : set the sorting order for telephone book entries (Last name or First name). Import contacts : touch to import the address book from the connected telephone or to update the previously imported address book. Delete other profiles : to delete individual or all non-active user profiles. Name : to display or edit the device name. This name is displayed to other Bluetooth devices in their Bluetooth settings. Paired devices : displays paired devices. Separating and connecting individual Bluetooth devices and Bluetooth profiles. Find devices : finds Bluetooth devices that are set to visible and are within the range of the infotainment system. The maximum range is approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : this function must be activated if you want to connect an external audio source to the infotainment system via Bluetoothpage 28. Assigned speed dial button: touch to delete the stored number. Unassigned speed dial button: touch to store a number from the address book to the speed dial button. User profile settings In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then User profile . First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 39 40 Introduction First read and observe the introductory information given on page 40. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
System settings main menu (Setup) . Press the SETUP infotainment button to open the System setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. System settings main menu (Setup) Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : ejects the memory card from the system. Once the memory card has been ejec-
ted from the system the function button is greyed out. Sound : make sound and volume settings page 42. Screen : make screen settings. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Time and date : set the time and date. Language : select the desired language for text and voice output. Keypad : select the required layout (alphabetical or keyboard layout). More keypad languages : select additional keypad languages. Units : sets units of measurement for displays in the vehicle. Bluetooth : make settings relating to Bluetooth page 39. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. Display off (in 10 s) : when this function is activated, the screen switches off if no button is press-
ed on the infotainment system for about ten seconds. The screen is switched back on by touch-
ing the screen or pressing an infotainment button. Brightness : select the brightness of the screen. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Show clock in standby mode : the screen shows the current time when the infotainment system is in standby mode. Time : to set the current time. Time format : select the format for the time display (12 or 24-hour). Summer (DST) : summer time is activated. Date : set the current date. Date format : to select the format for the date display (DD.MM.YY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY). Distance, Speed, Temperature, Volume, Consumption and Pressure. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 40 ment system works properly. It is important that the correct date and time are set in the vehicle to ensure the infotain-
Function button: effect Factory settings : restoring the factory settings will erase entered data and settings depending on which option has been selected. System information : displays the system information (serial number, hardware and software versions). Copyright : copyright information. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 41 42 Introduction Sound and volume settings First read and observe the introductory information given on page 42. Changes are automatically stored when a menu is closed. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Adjusting settings . Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Adjusting settings Press the SOUND infotainment button. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button and then select Sound to open the Sound setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Max. switch-on volume : define the maximum volume at switch-on. Announcements : to set the output volume for announcements (e.g. traffic announcements). Speed-dep. vol. (GALA) : define the scope of the speed-dependent volume control. The audio vol-
ume is automatically increased as the vehicle speed increases. Audio lower. : set how much the volume of the infotainment system should be reduced by when the ParkPilot is active. AUX volume : to set the output volume for audio sources that are connected via the AUX-IN mul-
timedia socket (Quiet, Medium or Loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources. BT audio : to set the output volume for audio sources connected via Bluetooth (quiet, medium or loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sour-
ces. Function button: effect Bass - Mid- Treble : sets the tonal quality (Bass - Mid - Treble). Balance or Balance - Fader : set the sound focus. The crosshair shows the where the sound is currently focused in the car's interior. To move the sound focus, touch the required position on the interior view or use the arrow buttons to change the position. To place the focus of sound at the centre of the interior view, touch the function button between the arrows. Volume : to make volume settings. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources If you need to increase the output volume of an ex-
ternal audio source, first lower the base volume on the infotainment system. If the sound from the external audio source is too quiet, increase the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Medium or Loud. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 42 If the sound from the connected external audio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Me-
dium or Quiet. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 43 AM A2DP AUX-IN AVRCP Abbreviation Definition Abbreviations DIN DRM EON FM HFP MP3 RDS TP VBR WMA Generic technology for the transmission of audio signals via Bluetooth (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile). Amplitude modulation (medium wave, MW). Auxiliary audio input. Universal technology for remote control of audio sources via Bluetooth (Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile). German Standards Authority (Deutsches Institut fr Normung). Digital rights management. Supporting of other networks (enhanced other network). Frequency modulation (very high frequency, VHF). Wireless telephony (hands-free profile). Format for compressing audio files. Radio data system. Traffic news function (traffic program). Variable bit rate. Format for compressing audio files. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 44 Bluetooth Function buttons (soft keys) External data storage device PHONE main menu . 34 USB . 26 External audio sources . 27 Adjusting playback volume . 42 BT audio . 28 F Factory settings . 40 FM . 12, 44 Frequency band Profiles . 31 Settings . 39 Bluetooth audio . 28 Browsing lists . 9 BT audio . 28 Buttons . 8 Infotainment system . 6 AM . 12 Changing . 12 FM . 12 Selecting . 12 Function buttons . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Operating . 8 Radio main menu . 12 Index A AM . 12 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 AUX-IN . 27 AUX-IN socket . 27 External audio sources . 27 Selecting . 23 AUX-IN socket . 27 B Base volume . 8 Adjusting . 8 Muting . 8 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Cannot be read . 25 Ejecting . 25 Faulty . 25 Inserting . 25 Mode . 25 Selecting . 23 Checkboxes . 8 Control elements (infotainment system) . 6 Copyright . 20 Information . 41 Cursor . 10 D Dialling a number . 36 During a telephone call . 35 E Eject Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Infotainment buttons . 6, 7 Input window . 10 Interference from a mobile telephone . 7 Introduction . 3 K Keypad . 10 M Main menu G GALA . 42 H Hard keys . 7 Hard keys (infotainment system) . 6 I Ignition off MEDIA . 22 PHONE . 34 RADIO . 12 Settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound . 42 C Call lists . 37 CD see CD . 25 EON . 17, 44 Explosion risk areas AUX-IN socket . 27 Bit rate . 20 Telephone . 31 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 MEDIA Index 45 P PHONE O On-screen keypad . 10 Operation Bluetooth audio . 28 CD audio data . 20 CD cannot be read . 25 CD faulty . 25 CD mode . 25 Changing media source . 23 Changing tracks . 24 Copyright . 20 Displays . 22 Displays and symbols . 23 Ejecting a CD . 25 External data storage device connected to Additional display information . 11 Adjusting the volume . 8 Browsing lists . 9 Checkboxes . 8 Entries . 10 Function buttons . 8 Infotainment buttons . 7 Input window . 10 Muting . 8 On-screen keypad . 10 PHONE . 30, 34 RADIO . 12 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Scrolling . 9 Slider . 9 Switching on and off . 7 Touchscreen . 8 USB port . 26 Fast forward . 24 Fast reverse . 24 Function buttons . 22 Inserting a CD . 25 Inserting memory card . 26 Main menu . 22 Media mode . 20 Media source selection menu . 23 Memory card cannot be read . 26 MP3 files . 20 Playback modes . 22 Playing order . 21 Playlists . 21 Preparing for removal . 26 Random play (Mix) . 22 Removing memory card . 26 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements . 20 Restrictions . 21 Scan function (SCAN) . 22 Selecting storage devices . 23 Selecting track . 24 Settings . 28 Track information . 23 Track list . 24 WMA files . 20 Media sources . 23 AUX-IN . 23 CD . 23 Memory card . 23 Selecting . 23 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution A2DP . 31 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 Bluetooth profiles . 31 Bluetooth settings . 39 Call lists . 37 Connecting via infotainment system . 32 Contacts . 36 Description of functions . 31 Dialling . 36 Displays and symbols . 35 During a telephone call . 35 Entering telephone number . 36 Explosion risk areas . 31 Function buttons . 34 General information . 31 HFP . 31 Main menu . 34 Mobile telephone pairing . 32 Pairing via infotainment system . 32 Settings . 38 Speed dial buttons . 38 Telephone book . 36 Telephone control . 30 Telephone control system . 34 User profile settings . 39 Cannot be read . 26 Inserting . 26 Preparing memory card for removal . 26 Removing . 26 Selecting . 23 Muting . 8 N Numbers AUX-IN . 27 CD . 25 External data storage device (USB) . 26 MEDIA . 22 Memory card . 22 RADIO . 12 Track . 24 Dialling . 36 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Memory card Playback 46 Screen Scan function (SCAN) MEDIA . 22 RADIO . 16 see Memory card . 26 Setting date . 40 Settings Operating . 8 Screen (infotainment system) . 6 Scrolling . 9 SD card AM . 18 Bluetooth . 39 Defaults . 40 Factory settings . 40 FM . 18 Main menu . 40 Media . 28 Menu and system settings . 40 PHONE . 38 Radio . 18 Sound . 42 System . 40 User profile . 39 Volumes . 42 Setting time . 40 SETUP Pop-up windows . 8 Q Quick reference guide . 3 R RADIO . 12 AM settings . 18 Display of station names . 13 Displays and symbols . 13 EON . 17 FM settings . 18 Frequency change . 12 Function buttons . 12 Main menu . 12 Radio mode . 12 Radio text . 16 RDS . 13 Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting stations . 14 Settings . 18 Setting station frequency . 14 Setting stations . 14 Station buttons . 14 Station list . 14 Station tracking via RDS . 13 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing stations . 14 TP (traffic program) . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news . 17 Radio text (RDS) . 16 Random play (Mix) . 22 RDS . 13 Automatic station tracking . 13 Radio text . 16 RDS Regional . 13 TP (traffic program) . 17 Repeat . 22 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements for CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting . 14 Setting . 14 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing . 14 Station search . 16 Station tracking . 13 Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Switching off . 7 Switching on . 7 T Telephone control Infotainment system . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Radio main menu . 12 Sound focus (balance, fader) . 42 Sound settings (treble, bass) . 42 Speed-dependent volume . 42 Speed dial buttons . 38 Station buttons . 14 Station names . 13 Stations CDs . 20 memory cards . 20 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Rotary/push knobs (infotainment system) . 6 S Safety information see Settings . 40 Slider . 9 Soft keys Media . 22 Radio . 16 Infotainment system . 3 see PHONE . 30 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 SCAN Index 47 USB Volume User profile V VHF Telephone control system (PHONE) see FM . 44 Settings . 39 see TP (traffic program) . 17 Connecting an external data storage device . 26 Disconnecting . 26 Not readable . 26 U Unit buttons . 7 Switching off . 33 Text input . 10 Things to note AUX operation . 27 Displays . 11 Volume reduction . 7 Timeout . 7 Touchscreen (infotainment system) . 6 TP (traffic program) EON . 17 Switching on and off . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Track list . 24 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news Adjusting . 8 Base volume . 8 Determining for external audio sources . 42 Speed-dependent volume increase (GALA) . 42 Traffic announcements . 42 Volume distribution (balance, fader) . 42 Volume reduction . 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 48
1 2 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.44 MiB | / October 09 2014 |
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour:
Radio Stand: 21.08.2013 Englisch: 11.2013 Artikel-Nr.: 142.5R6.RCT.20 L40SE2 1425R6RCT20 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution ment. NOTICE the next page. DANGER CAUTION WARNING Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation on the protection of the environ-
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to slight or se-
vere injuries if you do not observe the warn-
ing. Texts with this symbol indicate situations which could cause damage to the vehicle or ve-
hicle equipment if you do not observe the warning. er, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concern-
ing any term. Symbols like these refer you to warnings within the same section or on a given page. They draw your attention to possi-
ble risks of accident or injury and explain how they can be avoided. Cross reference to information about pos-
sible damage to your vehicle within the same section or on a given page. Description of symbols Refers to a section within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes that should always be observed. Indicates that the section is continued on Indicates the end of a section. Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible. Indicates a registered trademark. Howev-
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which will lead to fatal or severe in-
juries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Volkswagen AG works continuously to develop and further improve all models. Please understand that we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifications at any time. The data provided con-
cerning scope of delivery, appearance, perform-
ance, dimensions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and vehicle functions are all correct at the time of going to print. Some of the equipment described might not yet be available in a particular vehicle (information can be provided by your local Volkswagen dealership), and some equipment may not be available in certain countries. No legal com-
mitment may be inferred from the information, illus-
trations or descriptions in this manual. No part of this manual may be reprinted, repro-
duced or translated without the written permission of Volkswagen AG. All rights under the laws of copyright are expressly reserved by Volkswagen AG. Subject to alteration and amendment. Printed in Germany. Volkswagen AG 2013 This paper was bleached without the use of chlorine. FCC Compliance Statement [Level 4]
<North America>
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turn-ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution:
Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
<Canada>
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause Interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION MODEL L40SE2 Dimensions (mm) W Dimensions (mm) H Dimensions (mm) D 219.1 118.5 208.7 Weight (KG) 1.48 Power Requirement 9V~18V Power Consumption 25W * 4CH Bluetooth Specification Standard Bluetooth Version 2.1 Frequency Range 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz Output Power (Max.)
+4 dBm Max. 3 2 3 6 7 Index . 45 Abbreviations . 44 Table of Contents About this manual . Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system . 30 Description of telephone control system . 34 Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound and volume settings . 42 Audio mode Radio mode . 12 Media mode . 20 Introduction Before using the unit for the first time . Safety information for the infotainment system . Overview of the control elements . General information on operating the unit . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Table of Contents 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 1425R6RCT20 1 of the equipment described might not be fitted in your vehicle. Your Volkswagen dealership can pro-
vide more information on this. All details provided in this manual correspond to the information available at the time of going to print and apply only to factory-fitted infotainment systems. Due to continuous technical improvement of the infotainment system and possible updates to the unit's software, the displays and functions on the infotainment system may differ from the details given in this manual. No claims may be derived from the differing details, illustrations or descrip-
tions. Please ensure that this manual is in the vehicle if you lend or sell the vehicle to someone else. About this manual An alphabetical index is included at the end of this manual. A list of abbreviations explains technical abbre-
viations and terms. Directions and positions (e.g. right, left, front, rear) are normally relative to the vehicle's direction of travel. Illustrations help with orientation and should be regarded as a general guide. In right-hand drive vehicles the controls may sometimes be different to those displayed in illus-
trations or described in the text. All equipment and models are described without indicating whether the equipment is optional or specific to the model type. This means that some CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 2 page 40. WARNING WARNING Introduction Safety information for the infotainment system Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Operating the infotainment sys-
tem can distract you from the road. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Setting the volume too high may damage your hearing. This also applies even if you are only exposed to high volumes for short periods. Before using the unit for the first time Before using the infotainment system for the first time, carry out the following steps. This will enable you to use the infotainment system safely and make full use of the functions it provides:
Observe safety notes page 3. Familiarise yourself with the controls for the infotainment system page 7. In the System setup, reset the infotainment system to its original condition (factory settings) Use suitable data storage devices for media mode page 20. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution External devices that are placed loose in the vehicle or not properly secured can be flung though the interior and cause injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. You should never position or attach an ex-
ternal device on a door, on the windscreen or above or near to the areas marked AIRBAG on the steering wheel, the dash panel and the seat backrests, or between these areas and the vehicle occupants. External devices can cause serious injury in an accident, especial-
ly when the airbags deploy. The volume level may suddenly change when you switch audio source or connect a new audio source. Reduce the base volume before switching audio source or connecting a new audio source. The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. Opening the housing on a CD player can lead to injuries from invisible laser radiation. CD players should only be repaired by a qualified workshop. Connecting leads for external devices may obstruct the driver. Arrange the connecting leads so that they do not obstruct the driver. The infotainment system can be damaged by incorrect insertion of a storage device or inser-
tion of an incompatible storage device. Connecting, inserting or removing a storage device while the vehicle is in motion can dis-
tract you from the road and lead to accidents. WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 3 NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE (Continued) NOTICE (Continued) Only clean 12 cm standard CDs should be used. The vehicle loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound is distor-
ted. The CD drive can be damaged by any foreign objects attached to a storage device, and by ir-
regularly shaped storage devices. Do not affix stickers or other items to the data storage device. Stickers may peel off and damage the CD drive. Do not use printable data storage devi-
ces. Coatings and prints may peel off and damage the drive. Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-
larly shaped CDs or DVDs. Do not insert DVD Plus discs, dual discs or flip discs, as these are thicker than nor-
mal CDs. When inserting a memory card, ensure that it is correctly positioned page 20. Applying force may destroy the memory card slot's locking mechanism. Only use suitable memory cards. When inserting and removing a CD, always hold it flat and at a right angle to the front of the unit. Inserting or removing a CD at an angle to the drive can lead to scratching page 20. Inserting a second CD while a CD is already in the CD drive or being ejected can destroy the CD drive in the unit. Always wait until the CD is completely ejected!
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 4 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 5 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 11 7 7 8 8 9 10 Introduction is available from the local authorities. Due to country-specific legislation, certain functions cannot be selected on the screen Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle loudspeakers. when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information General information on operating the unit Not all listed function buttons and functions may be available due to the device software used in your market. The equipment is not faulty if a function button is missing from the screen. In some vehicles equipped with ParkPilot, the volume of the current audio source is auto-
matically lowered when reverse gear is engaged. Volume reduction can be set in the Sound setup menupage 42. Changes to settings may cause the display content to vary and some aspects of the infotainment sys-
tem operation to differ from the descriptions given in this manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons . Switching on and off . Adjusting base volume . Operating function buttons and displays on the screen . Selecting list entries and browsing lists . Input windows with on-screen keypad . Additional display information and display options . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Infotainment buttons This manual uses a button symbol with blue con-
tent and the term infotainment button to refer to buttons on the infotainment system, e.g. the info-
tainment button MEDIA . Infotainment buttons are operated either by press-
ing them or by pressing and holding. Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons information on page 7. After switching on, the system starts at the last se-
lected volume setting, provided that this does not exceed the preselected maximum switch-on vol-
ume page 42, Sound and volume settings. Depending on the unit version and the country, the infotainment system may switch off automatically when the engine is switched off or the vehicle key Rotary/push knobs The left-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 is re-
ferred to as the volume control or the on/off switch. The right-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 4 is re-
ferred to as the setting knob. Switching on and off information on page 7. To switch the infotainment system on or off man-
ually, briefly press the rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 . Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly touch-
ing the touchscreen is sufficient to operate First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory the infotainment system. Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 7 other vehicle. switching the infotainment system back on. on page 3 and the introductory information The infotainment system is permanently linked to the vehicle. It cannot be used in an-
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected, the ignition must be switched on before First read and observe the safety warnings on page 7. Adjusting base volume Any media source currently being played is stop-
ped while the infotainment system is muted. ap-
pears on the display. is removed from the ignition lock. If the infotain-
ment system is switched on again, it will switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes
(switch-off delay). Function: action Increasing the volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 clockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel Booklet Owner's manual. Decreasing volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anticlockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Changes to the base volume are indicated by a bar on the screen. During this time the infotain-
ment system cannot be operated. It is possible to preset certain volume settings and adjustments page 42. Muting the infotainment system Turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anti-
clockwise until is displayed. OR: press the MUTE infotainment system but-
ton1) Fig. 1 2 . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Operating function buttons and displays on the screen duce the volume again before switching to another audio source. Fig. 2 Overview of possible function buttons on the screen If the base volume has been considerably in-
creased to play a certain audio source, re-
First read and observe the safety warn-
ings Composition Touch, Composition Colour 1) Depending on the unit version. 8 B A C OK
...
+ / -
... / ... Selecting list entries and browsing lists Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be selected. Overview of displays and function buttons Displays and function buttons: action and effect In the title bar, the currently selected menu and any other possible function buttons are displayed. Touch to open a further menu. Move the crosshair across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. OR: touch the desired position on the screen, the crosshair moves to this position. Touch to move up one level at a time from certain lists. Touch to move up one level at a time to the main menu from a submenu or to undo in-
puts made. Touch to open a pop-up window (option window), displaying further setting options. Some functions or displays are marked with a checkbox and are activated or deacti-
vated by touching this box. Touch to confirm an input or selection. Touch to close a pop-up window or an input window. Touch to change settings incrementally. Move the slider across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Browsing lists (scrolling) If there are more items available in a list view than can be displayed on the screen, function buttons for scrolling or a scroll bar are displayed on the right of the screen Fig. 3. Browsing lists line-by-line: touch the or function button briefly. Browsing lists page-by-page: briefly touch the screen above or below the scroll marker. Browsing long lists quickly page-by-page: touch and hold the screen above or below the scroll marker. To quickly scan through a long list, place your finger on the scroll marker and move it over the screen without losing contact. Lift your finger off the screen when you reach the desired position. List entries can be opened by touching them di-
rectly on the screen or by using the setting knob Fig. 1 4 . Marking and selecting list entries with the setting knob Turn the setting knob to mark each consecutive list entry with a selection box so you can browse through the list. Press the setting knob to select the marked list entry. Fig. 3 List entries settings menu information on page 7. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 9 Input windows with on-screen keypad First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 4 Input window with on-screen keyboard information on page 7. Input windows with on-screen keyboard allow you to enter text, such as an entry name for storing a destination or a search term for searching in long lists. Not all of the function buttons listed here are avail-
able in all countries and for all topics. Subsequent chapters only explain those functions that differ from the general view described here. Overview of function buttons Function buttons: action and effect The input line with the cursor is located on the left in the top line of the screen *. All inputs are dis-
played here. Input windows for free text input An input window for free text entry allows any let-
ter, number and special character to be entered in any combination. Touching the OK function button applies the se-
quence of characters currently displayed in the window. Input windows for selecting a stored entry It is only possible to select a sequence of letters, numbers and special characters that matches a stored entry. Every time a character is entered, a destination corresponding to the specifications is proposed in the input line. When terms are made up of more than one word, the space must be entered as well. If fewer than 99 entries are available, the number of remaining entries is displayed after the input line Fig. 4 2 . Touching this function button displays a list of these remaining entries. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Press and hold to open a pop-up window with special characters based on the letter shown. Touch the desired character to enter it. Some special characters can also be written out
(e.g. AE for ). Touch to switch between upper and lower case. Touch to enter a space. Touch to accept the suggestion in the input line and close the input window. Touch to delete characters in the input line from right to left. Press and hold to delete several characters at once. Touch to close the input window. 123... : touch to open the input window for numbers and special characters. ABC... : touch to go back to the input window for letters. Displays the number and opens the list of entries corresponding to the specifications that are still available. Letters/numbers Touch to insert the character in the input line. Composition Touch, Composition Colour Letters and OK 10 1 2 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory The displays that appear on the screen can vary depending on the settings, and may differ from those described here. Displays such as the current time and the current outside temperature can be displayed on the screen in the status bar. All displays appear only after the infotainment sys-
tem has completed start-up. Additional display information and display options information on page 7. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 11 with a window aerial. 12 13 14 14 16 16 17 17 18 Introduction RADIO main menu Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehicles Multi-storey car parks, tunnels, high buildings and mountains can impair radio reception. Audio mode Radio mode Basic information on use page 7 Menu and system settings (SETUP) page 40 Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
RADIO main menu . RDS radio data service . Station buttons . Selecting, setting and storing stations . Scan function (SCAN) . Radio text . TP function (traffic program) . Incoming traffic announcement . FM/AM settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Changes the displayed station button group by touching the function button. Opens the list of currently receivable radio stations page 14. Opens the frequency dial for the selected frequency band page 15. Opens the settings menu for the currently activated frequency band (FM or AM) page 18. Function buttons in the RADIO main menu Function button: effect 1 Selecting the frequency band Select the required frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Fig. 5 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 6 Radio mode station list 12
< / >
Function button: effect a) Varies by country and unit version. SCAN 1... to 12... RDS radio data service A RDS offa) TP No TP Possible displays and symbols Display: meaning Browses through the available or stored stations. Setting for the arrow buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on page 16. Station buttons for storing stations page 14. Updates the station list (AM frequency band) page 15. Displays station frequency or station name, and also possibly radio text. Station name and radio text are only displayed when RDS is available and activated page 13. The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 18. TP traffic news is activated and can be received page 17. No traffic news station can be received. The radio station is stored to a station button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Station name and automatic station tracking If RDS is available, station names can be dis-
played in the RADIO main menu and in the FM station list. FM radio stations may occasionally or continuously broadcast different content on different regional frequencies under the same station name (e.g. Ra-
dio 2). By default, automatic station tracking always switches to the currently selected station's frequen-
cy that offers the best reception, as the vehicle travels from one area to the next. As a result, you may lose the regional programme you are listening to. Automatic frequency changing and automatic sta-
tion tracking can be deactivated in the FM setup page 18. RDS (radio data system) is a radio data service which enables additional FM services, such as the display of station names, automatic station track-
ing, radio text and TP traffic news (TP). RDS is not supported by all units and is not availa-
ble everywhere or on every FM radio station. RDS can be deactivated in some country and unit versions page 18. Without RDS it is not possible to use radio data services. Fig. 7 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 8 Radio mode station list Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 13 Fig. 9 RADIO main menu Changing station button group Station buttons Selecting stations via the station buttons information on page 12. The radio stations are responsible for the content of the information sent. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory In the RADIO main menu, you can store stations from the currently selected frequency band on 12 consecutively numbered function buttons. These function buttons are called station buttons. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch the station button that shows the required station. When a stored station is selected via the station buttons, it will only be played if it can be received at your current location. Touch the Fig. 9 1 function button. The station buttons are displayed in groups of four function buttons
( 1 ... to 4 ... , 5 ... to 8 ... and 9 ... to 12 ... ). If radio text is shown instead of the station buttons, touch radio text in order to show the station buttons. See Storing stations page 15. Selecting, setting and storing stations Storing stations to station but-
tons Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 11 Radio mode station list Fig. 10 RADIO main menu Displaying station buttons 14 Updating the station list Displaying the frequency dial on page 3 and the introductory information Adjusting the frequency in stages Tuning to a station frequency manually Selecting stations from a station list Selecting stations Selecting stations using arrow buttons
< / >
First read and observe the safety warnings on page 12. Touch the < or > Fig. 10 function button. The unit only switches to stored or receivable stations, depending on what settings have been made for the arrow buttons. Setting for the ar-
row buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Search through the list and touch the required station to select it. To close the station list, touch the Fig. 11 function button. In the FM frequency band the station list is updated automatically. In the AM frequency band, touch the Fig. 11 function button to up-
date the station list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Turn the setting knob one stop further. OR: touch the Fig. 10 function button. Turn the setting knob. OR: touch the arrow buttons to the left or the right of the frequency band. Touch one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. The next receivable station is set automatically. OR: press and hold one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. When you release the button, the unit automatically tunes to the next available station. OR: place your finger on the slider in the frequency dial and drag it along the dial. Briefly press the setting knob. Manual frequency selection is also closed if you select a station with a station button. The frequency band closes automatically after a period of inactivity. Press and hold the desired station button Fig. 10 until a tone is soun-
ded. The station currently playing is then stored on that station button. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Stations already stored on a station button are marked in the station list with the Fig. 11 symbol. Select the desired station by pressing and holding on the screen. Touch the button to which you wish this station to be assigned. A signal tone sounds, and the station is then stored on this station but-
ton. Repeat the process to store further stations from the station list. All stored stations can be deleted individually or together in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Storing a station from the station list to a station button Storing the current station to a station button Quickly browsing through the frequency band Hiding the frequency band Deleting stored stations Storing stations Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 15 Starting the scan function Stopping the scan function First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Scan function (SCAN) information on page 12. When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current frequency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each. SCAN appears on the display. Fixed station names are indicated by a dot to each side of the name. The fixed text is adopted for all the station buttons on which the corresponding station is stored. Stopping station names scrolling (FM frequency) Some radio stations transmit a very long station name, which is shown on the screen as a scrolling text. To fix the text that is currently displayed to the screen, touch the station name and hold until a tone is sounded. Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the function button and then select SCAN . Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the SCAN function button to end the scan function at the station arrived at. Manually selecting a station with the station buttons also stops the scan function. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch displayed radio text Fig. 12. Touch displayed radio text Fig. 13. In the FM setup menu, deactivate the Radio text function button by touch-
ing it page 18. Fig. 12 RADIO main menu information on page 12. Hiding station buttons Displaying station buttons Switching off radio text per-
manently The station buttons can be hidden to enlarge the display area for the radio text Fig. 13. Some RDS-compatible stations also broadcast ad-
ditional text information known as radio text. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 13 Radio mode: radio text is visible Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio text 16 Fig. 15 Radio mode: station list with TP display TP function (traffic program) First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 14 RADIO main menu with TP display information on page 12. In FM mode, the selected station must support the TP function. After the TP function is switched on, if you change via the station buttons or manual se-
lection to a station that does not support the TP function, traffic news monitoring will not be possi-
ble (display: No TP). If the currently selected traffic news station can no longer be received, No TP is also displayed and you will have to start a manual station search page 14. In AM mode or media mode, the unit will always automatically tune to a traffic news station in the background, provided that a TP station is availa-
ble. This procedure may take some time. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic news monitoring with the TP function is only possible if a traffic news station is available. Traffic news stations are indicated in the RADIO main menu and in the station list by TP Fig. 14 and Fig. 15. Some stations that do not broadcast their own traf-
fic news support the TP function through a link to a traffic news station (EON). Switching the TP function on and off In the FM/AM setup menu, activate or deac-
tivate the Traffic program (TP) function button by touching it page 18. If the station that is currently selected does not support the TP function, No TP will be shown in the top right of the screen. Activated TP function and station selection While traffic news monitoring is on, TP is displayed at the top right in audio mode Fig. 14. Traffic an-
nouncements broadcast by the current station or a linked traffic news station will interrupt the current audio mode. During the traffic announcement a pop-up window is displayed and, if required, the radio is switched to the traffic news station (EON) for the duration of the traffic announcement. The media mode is paused and the volume is ad-
justed to the preset level page 42. Incoming traffic announcement information on page 12. Incoming traffic announcements will interrupt the active audio mode. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 17 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory FM/AM settings information on page 12. The traffic announcement volume setting can be adjusted with the volume control Fig. 1 1 . The adjusted volume setting will be applied to sub-
sequent announcements. FM setup Select the FM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the FM setup menu. Touch the Cancel function button to end the traffic announcement. The TP function remains ac-
tivated. OR: touch the Deactivate function button to end the current traffic announcement and permanently switch off the TP function. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 17. Radio text : radio text is activated page 16. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Radio Data System (RDS) a): the radio data system (RDS) is deactivated page 13. If the checkbox is deactivated, the traffic program (TP) and radio text functions are not available. Alternative frequency (AF) : automatic station tracking is activated. If the checkbox is deactiva-
ted, automatic station tracking is switched off. The RDS Regional function button is then inac-
tive (greyed out). Fixed : the unit only switches to alternative frequencies for the selected station that broadcast the same regional service. Automatic : the unit always switches to the station's frequency that currently offers the best reception. As a result, regional programmes may be interrupted. a) Varies by country and unit version. AM setup Select the AM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the AM setup menu. All : all stored stations will be deleted (FM 1, FM 2, FM 3). To delete individual stations, selected the desired preset list FM 1 , FM 2 or FM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. RDS Regional : defines the setting for automatic station tracking with RDS page 13. Advanced setup : settings for the RDS radio data services. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 18 All : all stored stations will be deleted (AM 1, AM 2, AM 3). To delete individual stations, select the desired preset list AM 1 , AM 2 or AM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 19 27 26 28 28 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 Introduction Media mode This product is subject to certain intellectual property rights and copyrights owned by the Media sources are audio sources containing au-
dio files on various different storage devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external MP3 player). These au-
Microsoft Corporation. The use or distribution of this type of technology outside this product re-
quires a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft company. dio files can be played by the infotainment system from its corresponding drives or audio input sock-
ets (internal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN socket etc.). Copyright Audio and video files stored on data storage devi-
ces are normally subject to national and interna-
tional copyright laws. Observe legal requirements. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Data storage device and file requirements . Playing order of files and folders . MEDIA main menu . Changing the media source . Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu . Selecting tracks from the track list . Inserting or ejecting a CD . Inserting or removing a memory card . External data storage device connected to USB port . External audio source connected to the AUX-
IN socket . Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth . Media settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Requirements for playing in the unit CD Digital Audio specification . MP3 files (.mp3) with bit rates of between 32 and 320 kbit/s or with variable bit rate. WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono/stereo without copy protec-
tion. Playlists in the formats PLS, M3U and WPL. Playlists no larger than 20 kB and containing no more than 1,000 entries. File name and path information not longer than 256 charac-
ters. Media source Audio CDs (up to 80 minutes). CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW audio data CDs up to max. 700 MB (mega-
bytes) with the file systems ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 SD and MMC memory cards with the file systems FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, VFAT or exFAT up to max. 2 GB (gigabytes), SDHC memory cards up to max. 32 GB and SDXC memory cards up to max. 2 TB (terabytes). Data storage device and file requirements information on page 20. Factory-fitted CD drives conform to safety class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/ VDE 0837. The infotainment system only accepts standard 12 cm CDs, and memory cards measuring 32 mm x 24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm. The supported file formats listed are collectively re-
ferred to below as audio files. A CD containing audio files of these types is referred to as an au-
dio data CD. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 20 Do not use memory card adapters. Audio file playback via Bluetootha). Media source AUX External audio source. Playing order of files and folders No liability can be accepted for damaged or lost files on the storage devices. Requirements for playing in the unit Playback of external audio sources via 3.5 mm jack plug page 27. The external media player must support the A2DP Blue-
tooth profile page 28. The reading time may vary considerably depend-
ing on the condition of the storage device (copying and deleting actions), folder structure and file type. Playlists only determine a certain playing order. There are no files stored in a playlist. The unit will not play a playlist if the files are not stored on the storage device at the locations referred to by the playlist (relative file paths). a) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Restrictions and notes Contamination, exposure to high temperatures and mechanical damage can render storage devices unusable. Please observe the manufacturer's in-
structions. Variations in the quality of storage devices from dif-
ferent manufacturers can lead to problems during playback. Please observe copyright laws. The unit may be unable to read individual tracks or the entire storage device due to the storage devi-
ce's configuration or the devices and programs used for recording. Information about the best ways to create audio files and configure storage devices (compression rate, ID3 tag etc.) can be found online. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio files on storage devices are often sorted by folders and playlists to determine a certain playing order. Tracks, folders and playlists on a storage device are each sorted by name in alphanumeric order. The illustration shows a typical audio data CD that contains tracks , folders and subfolders Fig. 16. The tracks are played in the following order1):
1. 2. Tracks 1 and 2 in the CD's root directory Tracks 3 and 4 in the first folder F1 in the CD's root directory Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of the folder F1 Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of the subfolder F1.1 Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of the folder F1 Tracks 8 and 9 in the second folder F2 The playing order can be altered by selecting different playback modes page 22. Fig. 16 Possible structure on an audio data CD information on page 20. 1) The Mix/Repeat including subfolders function must be activated page 40 in the Media setup menu. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 21 3. 4. 5. 6. MEDIA main menu the track selection menu page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Playlists are not played automatically. In-
stead they must be specifically selected via Function buttons in the MEDIA main menu Function button: effect Fig. 17 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. In the MEDIA main menu, various media sources can be selected and played. Press the MEDIA infotainment button to open the MEDIA main menu Fig. 17. Playback of the media source that was most re-
cently played resumes from the point where it stop-
ped. The media source currently playing is indicated at the bottom left in the function button 1 . The MEDIA main menu will indicate if no media source is available. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to select a different media source page 23. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : Bluetooth audio page 28. Opens the track list page 24. Changes track when in media mode page 24 Playback stops. The function button changes to page 24. Playback is resumed. The function button changes to page 24. Opens the Media setup menu page 28. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Composition Touch, Composition Colour
< / >
22 1 A SCAN Function button: effect Changing the media source Displays and symbols in the MEDIA main menu Display: meaning B RDS offa) TP No TP a) Varies by market and unit version. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on. To start the scan func-
tion, press setting knob Fig. 1 4 or open the track list and touch the SCAN function button. Display of track information (CD text , ID3 tag with MP3 files). Audio CDs: track and track number corresponding to the track order on the CD are dis-
played. Audio files: artist name, album name and track name are displayed. Track playing time and remaining playing time in minutes and seconds. The remaining playing time displayed may differ for audio files with variable bit rate (VBR). The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 12. TP is activated and can be received page 12. No traffic news station can be received. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In the MEDIA main menu, press the MEDIA in-
fotainment button as often as required to switch between the available media sources. OR: in the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 18 1 function button and select the desired media source. Media sources not currently available are shown as inactive (grey) in the pop-up window. If a media source that has already been played is selected again, playback is resumed from the point that was last reached. Audio or audio data CD in the internal CD drive page 25. Memory card page 26. External data storage device connected to USB page 26. External audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. Bluetooth audio page 28. Optionally selectable media sources Function button: media source CD SD card USB AUX BT audio Fig. 18 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. The media source can also be changed in the Track list view page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
on page 3 and the introductory ings Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 23 Briefly touch the function button > once. Briefly touch the function button < twice. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory You can browse through the tracks of the media source that is currently playing using the arrow but-
tons. You cannot switch to playback from a playlist us-
ing the arrow keys. Playback from a playlist must be started manually via the track selection menu page 24, Selecting tracks from the track list. Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Fig. 19 MEDIA main menu Controlling playback via the MEDIA main menu Effect Action Briefly touch the function button < once. Goes to the start of the current track. If the track is short-
er than 3 seconds, the system goes to the start of the previous track. Goes to the start of the previous track. Changes from the first track to the last track on the storage device that is being played. Goes to the next track. Changes from the last track to the first track on the storage device that is being played. Fast reverse. Fast forward. Playback stops. The function button changes to . Playback is resumed. The function button changes to
. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Opening the track list In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button Fig. 19 to open the track list. The track that is currently playing is highlighted Fig. 20. Search through the track list and touch the de-
sired track. If track information is available, the track name is displayed instead of Track + No.. Press and hold the < function button. Press and hold the > function button. Briefly touch the function button once. Briefly touch the function button once. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory information on page 20. Selecting tracks from the track list Fig. 20 Track list from a media source Composition Touch, Composition Colour 24 A SCAN Overview of function buttons in the track list Function button: effect Opens the Sources menu. Touch to select a different media source. Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to change the media source. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : external media player connected via Bluetooth page 28. Touch the function button to open the parent folder of the current folder on the media source. The name of the current folder will be displayed to the right of the symbol. Starts playback at the first track. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. Closes track list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The internal CD drive can play audio CDs and au-
dio data CDs. When an audio CD without CD text is playing, only TITLE and the track number, corresponding to the playing order on the data medium, are displayed in the centre line of the screen. If the audio file CDs played contain additional track information (CD text , ID3 tag for MP3 files), it can be displayed on the screen. Inserting a CD Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. Push the CD into the CD slot only to the point where it is drawn in automatically. When the CD is inserted, playback will start au-
tomatically. Ejecting a CD In some countries, the vehicle key must be in the ignition lock of a cabriolet vehicle in order to eject a CD (anti-theft protection). Press the EJECT infotainment button. The CD in the drive will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 10 seconds. For safety reasons, the CD will be drawn back into the player if it is not removed within roughly 10 seconds, but the unit will not switch to CD mode. CD cannot be read or is faulty A message will be shown on the screen if the data on an inserted CD cannot be read or the CD is faulty. Inserting or ejecting a CD information on page 20. Tracks, folders and playlists can also be marked by turning the setting knob then loa-
Uneven road surfaces and strong vibrations can cause playback to jump. First read and observe the safety warn-
on page 3 and the introductory ings ded or opened up or opened by pressing the knob. Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 25 Vertical card slot Horizontal card slot back of CDs is disabled. ery time, contact a qualified workshop. Inserting a memory card Fig. 1 7 When the temperature inside the infotain-
ment system is too high, loading and play-
First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. If you insert a number of different CDs and receive the message Error: CD drive ev-
Inserting or removing a memory card information on page 20. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the lettering facing left (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the label facing up (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution If a memory card cannot be inserted, ensure that it is positioned correctly and is compatible with the unit. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the memory card. Removing a memory card The inserted memory card must be prepared for removal. In the MEDIA main menu touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove the SD card safely function but-
ton. OR: touch the Remove safely function button and then select SD card . Removing The connected storage device must be prepared before removal. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove safely function button and then select USB . Data media cannot be read The message No playable files available appears if the data on the connected storage de-
vice cannot be read. Once the memory card has been ejected from the system, a message is shown on the screen and the function button is greyed out. The memory card can then be removed. Press the inserted memory card. The memory card springs out of the slot. Remove the memory card. Memory card cannot be read If you insert a memory card containing data that cannot be read, the unit will not change to memory card mode after loading. A corresponding message is displayed. In some countries and with some equipment lev-
els, the vehicle may be fitted with a USB connec-
tion in the stowage compartment in the centre console. Booklet Owner's Manual, chapter Prac-
tical equipment. Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the data storage device. External data storage device connected to USB port information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 26 Fig. 21 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external storage device. Fig. 22 External audio source connected to AUX-
IN External audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The AUX-IN socket Fig. 1 6 can only be used with a 3.5 mm jack plug. The connected external audio source is played over the vehicle speakers and cannot be control-
led via the infotainment system. AUX shows on the screen when an external audio source is connected Fig. 22. Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN socket Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Connect the external audio source to the AUX-
IN socket. Information on operating an external audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket Action Selecting another audio source on the infotainment system. Stopping playback on the external audio source. Disconnecting the plug from the AUX-IN socket. Effect The external audio source continues to run in the background. The infotainment system remains in the AUX menu. The infotainment system switches to playback of the most recently played audio source. Start playback on the external audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 21 1 function button and select AUX . The output volume of the external audio source should be adjusted to the volume of the other au-
dio sources page 42. Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external audio source. Interference may occur if the external audio source is powered from the vehicles 12-volt Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 socket. 27 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth Fig. 23 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Touch the Find devices function button to con-
nect an external Bluetooth audio source for the first time. OR: touch the Paired devices function button to select an external Bluetooth audio source from the list. Continue the process by following the prompts on the infotainment system screen and in the dis-
play on the Bluetooth audio source. You may then have to start playback on the Blue-
tooth audio source manually. When playback on the Bluetooth audio source is stopped, the infotainment system remains in Blue-
tooth audio mode. Controlling playback The extent to which the Bluetooth audio source can be controlled via the infotainment system var-
ies depending on what Bluetooth audio source is connected. With media players that support the AVRCP Blue-
tooth profile, playback on the Bluetooth audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched to Bluetooth audio mode or to a different audio source. In addition, track display or track change is possible via the in-
fotainment system. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In Bluetooth audio mode, audio files from a Blue-
tooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone) that is connected via Bluetooth can be played over the vehicle loudspeakers (Bluetooth audio playback). Conditions The Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth profile. The Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be activated in the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Starting Bluetooth audio transfer Switch on Bluetooth visibility on the external Bluetooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone). Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Press the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the Fig. 23 1 function button and se-
lect BT audio . Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : memory card is ejected from the system and can then be safely removed page 26. Sound : sound settings page 42. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. Due to the large number of possible Blue-
tooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all described functions. Media settings information on page 20. source, e.g. key tones on a mobile telephone, to prevent interference noise and malfunctions. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Always switch off the warning and service tones on a connected Bluetooth audio Composition Touch, Composition Colour 28 Function button: effect Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Mix/Repeat including subfolders : subfolders will be included in the selected playback mode page 22. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 29 32 33 31 31 31 WARNING WARNING (Continued) Introduction area where the network is very weak or, in some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-
pass. This also means that no emergency calls can be made. Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-
correctly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This can cause injuries. While the vehicle is in motion, always se-
cure the mobile telephone properly outside the airbag deployment area. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
General information . Areas where special regulations apply . Bluetooth . Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system . Switching telephone control system off . The telephone functions described in the following section can be controlled via the infotainment sys-
tem if a mobile telephone that is switched on is paired and connected with the infotainment sys-
tem. The mobile telephone must support the Blue-
tooth function otherwise a connection cannot be made between the telephone and the infotainment system. If a mobile telephone is not connected to the info-
tainment system, the telephone control system cannot be used. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Carrying a mobile telephone that is switched on just next to a pacemaker may cause the pacemaker to malfunction. Maintain a gap of approximately 20 centi-
metres between the aerials of the mobile tele-
phone and the pacemaker, as mobile tele-
phones may affect the functioning of pace-
makers. Do not carry a mobile telephone in your breast pocket above your pacemaker when the telephone is switched on or in standby mode. If you suspect interference, switch off the mobile telephone immediately. Making telephone calls and operating the tel-
ephone control system while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road and lead to accidents. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Your call may be cut off or you may be un-
able to make calls if you are in an area with no mobile telephone network coverage, an The centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements if raised, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. High speeds, poor weather and poor road con-
ditions as well as the network quality may im-
pair telephone calls in the vehicle. Composition Touch, Composition Colour WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE 30 is available from the local authorities. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on First read and observe the introductory on information and safety warnings There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information When connecting the telephone control sys-
tem with a device using Bluetooth, read the device's operating manual for detailed safety infor-
mation. Use compatible Bluetooth products only. General information page 30. Areas where special regulations apply page 30. You may experience poor reception or may be cut off in areas where the signal is weak. Most electronic devices are shielded against high-
frequency signals. In rare cases, however, elec-
tronic devices may not be shielded against high-
frequency signals emitted by the telephone control system. This can cause interference. How the individual telephone menus are displayed depends on the mobile telephone being used. There may be differences. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Vehicle care and maintenance. Use compatible Bluetooth devices only. Informa-
tion on compatible Bluetooth products is available from your Volkswagen dealership or online. Follow the operating manual for your mobile tele-
phone and the instructions provided by the acces-
sory manufacturer. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the mobile telephone and mobile tele-
phone provision in areas with a risk of explosion. These areas are often clearly marked, but not al-
ways clude, for example:
Areas immediately around chemical pipelines and tanks. Lower decks of ships and ferries. The area around vehicles which run on liquid gas (such as propane or butane). Places where there are chemicals or particles such as flour, dust and metal powder in the air. All other places where the vehicle engine must be switched off. Your mobile telephone must always be switch-
ed off in areas where special regulations apply and when the use of mobile telephones is for-
bidden. The radiation produced by the mobile telephone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is used to connect a mobile telephone to the telephone control system fitted in a vehicle. A pairing process has to be carried out before the telephone control system can be used with a Bluetooth mobile telephone. Switch off the mobile telephone in areas with a risk of explosion!
First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Bluetooth page 30. in Introduction on page 30. They in-
Telephone control (PHONE) WARNING NOTICE 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 31 Music playback Bluetooth Advanced Audio Dis-
tribution Profile (A2DP):
Bluetooth profile for the transmission of ster-
eo-quality audio signals. Playback controls Bluetooth Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile (AVRCP):
Bluetooth profile for displaying track informa-
tion and control of playback in the mobile device. Some Bluetooth mobile telephones are detected and connected automatically when the ignition is switched on, if a connection already exists. For this to happen, the mobile telephone itself and the Bluetooth function in the telephone must be switched on and all active Bluetooth connections to other units must be disconnected. The Bluetooth connection is free of charge. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG, Inc. Bluetooth profiles When a mobile telephone is connected to the tele-
phone control system, data is exchanged via one of the Bluetooth profiles. Basic telephony Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile
(HFP):
If a mobile telephone is connected via HFP to the telephone control system, you can make calls wirelessly via the hands-free system. The vehicle's exterior aerial cannot be used with this. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehi-
cle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Entries have to be made on the mobile telephone keypad during the pairing process. The mobile tel-
ephone has to be at hand for this. Starting mobile telephone pairing Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Find telephone function button. OR:
Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Setup function button. Touch the Select telephone function button and then Find telephone . Once the search process is complete, the names of all Bluetooth devices found will be displayed on the screen. Select the mobile telephone to be paired from this list of Bluetooth devices and then select Hands-free telephone (HFP). The infotainment system and the mobile telephone are now connected. Further input may be required on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system to conclude the connection process. In order to operate a mobile telephone via the info-
tainment system, a single pairing process is re-
quired for both devices. Pairing should only be performed when the vehicle is stationary. Conditions Ignition is switched on. If necessary, disconnect any headsets from the mobile telephone. The Bluetooth function must be activated or set to visible on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system. The keypad lock on the mobile telephone has to be unlocked. Follow the operating manual for the mobile tele-
phone. The Bluetooth function is set to visible on the infotainment system for about 3 minutes after the ignition is switched on. Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system page 30. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Composition Touch, Composition Colour 32 ternet at www.volkswagen.com. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on You will find further information on pairing and connecting mobile telephones on the In-
Switching telephone control system off page 30. Pairing and connecting mobile telephones Several mobile telephones can be paired with the infotainment system, but only one mobile tele-
phone can be connected to the infotainment sys-
tem at a time. When you switch the infotainment system on, a connection is automatically set up with the mobile telephone that was connected last. If no connec-
tion can be set up with this mobile telephone, the telephone control system automatically attempts to set up a connection with the next mobile telephone in the list of paired devices. Bluetooth connections have a maximum range of 10 metres. Any active Bluetooth connection is in-
terrupted when this distance is exceeded. The con-
nection is automatically restored as soon as the device enters the Bluetooth range. If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mobile telephone. Depends on the mobile telephone:
Enter the PIN code that is then displayed on the infotainment system into the mobile telephone and confirm it. OR:
Compare the PIN code displayed on the info-
tainment system with the PIN code displayed on the mobile telephone. If the PIN code matches, it has to be confirmed on both devices. The PHONE main menu is displayed and the tele-
phone book and the call lists stored in the mobile telephone are loaded automatically once pairing has been completed. The time taken by the load-
ing process varies depending on the amount of da-
ta stored in the mobile telephone. This data is available on the infotainment system once the loading process is completed. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the ignition. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. The telephone control system is switched off and any active call is transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The telephone control system is not switched off if the vehicle key is left in the ignition lock after the engine is switched off. Once a set time has ex-
pired, a message appears on the infotainment sys-
tem screen informing you that the telephone con-
trol system will be switched off automatically. An active call will be transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The transfer of an active call from the tele-
phone control system to the mobile telephone can take up to approximately 10 seconds (depend-
ing on the mobile telephone being used). Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 33 34 35 36 36 37 38 38 39 39 Introduction PHONE main menu Some networks might not support all lan-
guage-dependent characters and services. Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle speakers. Description of telephone control system Some functions and settings are only available when the vehicle is stationary, and are not suppor-
ted by all mobile telephones. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
PHONE main menu . During a telephone call . Entering a telephone number . Telephone book menu (Contacts) . Call lists menu . Speed dial buttons . Telephone settings . Bluetooth settings . User profile settings . Up to 20 devices can be linked to the telephone control system. One device at a time can be con-
nected via the hands-free profile (HFP) or audio playback profile (A2DP) page 33. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Introduction to and safety information for tel-
ephone control system page 30 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Fig. 25 Incoming call data via the User profile setup menu page 39. The telephone book will be automati-
cally updated when the telephone is connected again (e.g. on the next journey). A maximum of 4 user profiles can be stored for mobile telephones in the telephone control system. If another mobile telephone is connected, the user profile which has not been used for the longest amount of time will be deleted automatically. Telephone control function buttons Press the PHONE infotainment button to open the PHONE main menu. Fig. 24 PHONE main menu Assignment to a user profile Telephone book data, call lists and stored speed dial buttons are assigned to a user profile and stor-
ed in the telephone control system. They are avail-
able when the mobile phone is connected with the telephone control system again. If, while connected to the radio, telephone book entries on the mobile telephone are changed, you can start a manual update of the telephone book First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 34 2 1 B A Function button: effect During a telephone call Telephone control displays and symbols Display: meaning The name of the mobile telephone network provider where the inserted SIM card or the SIM card of the paired mobile telephone is registered. Displays the telephone number or the stored name. The charge level of the paired mobile telephone. The signal strength of the current mobile telephone transmitter station. Name of the paired mobile telephone or the user profile in use. Touch to connect or pair an-
other mobile telephone. Speed dial buttons which can be used to store one telephone number from the telephone book each page 38. Opens the keypad to enter a telephone number page 36. Opens the telephone book in the paired mobile telephone page 36. Opens the call lists in the paired mobile telephone page 37. Opens the Telephone setup menu page 38. Touch to accept a call. Touch to end a call. OR: touch to reject an incoming call. Touch to mute the ring tone during a call or to switch the mute off. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch to make the call on the mobile telephone provision. Touch to switch off the microphone in the mobile telephone provision during a call ( func-
tion button changes to ). The conversation in the vehicle cannot be heard at the other end. appears on the display A . Touch the function button to switch on the microphone in the mobile telephone provision again. Touch to end a call. When a connection is made to a dialled telephone number, the PHONE main menu changes to the telephone call view Fig. 26. Displays and function buttons: action and effect a) First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 26 During a telephone call Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 35 B A Displays and function buttons: action and effect Entering a telephone number a) This function button is only displayed when the call is made on the mobile telephone. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 27 Entering a telephone number Possible functions Entering a telephone num-
ber In the PHONE main menu, press the function button.
: call is being made with the connected mobile telephone. Touch the function button to make the call on the mobile telephone provision.
: the microphone in the provision for mobile telephone is switched off.
: charge level of the paired mobile telephone. Display of call duration and telephone number or the stored name. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Enter the telephone number on the keypad. Touch the function button to dial the number. Enter the first letters of the required contact on the keypad. Possible en-
tries appear in the contact list. Browse through the contact list and touch the desired contact to make the call. Fig. 28 Contacts menu First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone book menu (Contacts) Selecting a contact from a list Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 29 Search window 36 Call lists menu Finding a contact in the search window Selecting a contact from a list Availability of telephone book menu depends on the mobile telephone being used. The telephone book can also be opened during an on-going telephone call. In the PHONE main menu, press the function button. It may take a few minutes after the first pairing process until the telephone book data1) from the paired mobile telephone is available on the info-
tainment system. The process could take up to an hour, depending on the amount of data to be trans-
ferred. If necessary, confirm the transfer on the mobile telephone. Possible functions Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. OR: if several numbers are allocated to the same contact, first touch the contact and then the desired number to make the call. Touch the Fig. 28 function button to open the search window. Enter the name you are looking for in the search window Fig. 29. The number of matching results is displayed to the right of the entry field. Touch the function button to go to the list view. Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Meaning Missed calls : shows telephone numbers of missed and unanswered calls. Dialled numbers : shows telephone numbers that were dialled on the mobile telephone and the infotainment system telephone control system. Received calls : shows all telephone numbers that were received on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system via the telephone control system. In the PHONE main menu, press the func-
tion button. Touch the ... Fig. 30 1 function button. Select the desired call list: All , Missed calls , Dialled numbers or Received calls . If a telephone number is already stored in the tele-
phone book, the stored name is displayed in the call list instead of the telephone number. Fig. 30 Call list menu Possible displays in the call menu Display Availability of call lists depends on the mobile telephone being used. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. 1) Depending on what device is used, only contacts from the telephone memory may be loaded. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 37 Speed dial buttons Assigning speed dial but-
tons Editing assigned speed di-
al buttons Fig. 31 PHONE main menu Possible functions First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. One telephone number from the telephone book can be stored to each of the speed dial buttons Fig. 31 1 . All speed dial buttons must be assigned manually and are then specific to a user profile. In the PHONE main menu, touch a free speed dial button. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. In the PHONE main menu, press and hold an assigned speed dial button until the Contacts menu opens. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. To close the Contacts menu without applying changes, touch the func-
tion button. Any telephone number stored on a speed dial button can be deleted in the User profile setup menu page 39. In the PHONE main menu, briefly touch an assigned speed dial button to dial the telephone number stored to that button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Hands-free a): the hands-free function is activated. Touch the function button during a telephone call to make the call on the mobile telephone. Select telephone : select the mobile telephone from the list view to connect it to the infotainment system. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Contacts stored to the speed dial buttons are not updated automatically. If a contact stored to a speed dial button is modified on the mobile tel-
ephone, the speed dial button must be assigned again. Telephone settings Deleting assigned speed dial buttons Dialling with speed dial buttons In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Find telephone : touch to connect a new mobile telephone. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 38 First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then Bluetooth . Bluetooth settings Function button: effect Bluetooth : touch to switch Bluetooth off. All existing connections are ended. Visibility : switch Bluetooth visibility on and off. Visible : Bluetooth visibility is activated. Not visible : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated. The Bluetooth visibility has to be switched on before a Bluetooth device can be externally paired with the infotainment system. Upon start : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated approximately 3 minutes after the engine is star-
ted. Function button: effect User profile : opens the User profile setup menu page 39. Select ring tone b): select the ring tone from the list of preset ring tones. The selected ring tone is played and stored when you leave the submenu. a) This function button is only active during a telephone call. b) Either the selected ring tone or the ring tone set in the mobile phone is sounded, depending on what mobile phone is being used. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Manage favourites : to edit speed dial buttons. Sort by : set the sorting order for telephone book entries (Last name or First name). Import contacts : touch to import the address book from the connected telephone or to update the previously imported address book. Delete other profiles : to delete individual or all non-active user profiles. Name : to display or edit the device name. This name is displayed to other Bluetooth devices in their Bluetooth settings. Paired devices : displays paired devices. Separating and connecting individual Bluetooth devices and Bluetooth profiles. Find devices : finds Bluetooth devices that are set to visible and are within the range of the infotainment system. The maximum range is approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : this function must be activated if you want to connect an external audio source to the infotainment system via Bluetoothpage 28. Assigned speed dial button: touch to delete the stored number. Unassigned speed dial button: touch to store a number from the address book to the speed dial button. User profile settings In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then User profile . First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 39 40 Introduction First read and observe the introductory information given on page 40. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
System settings main menu (Setup) . Press the SETUP infotainment button to open the System setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. System settings main menu (Setup) Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : ejects the memory card from the system. Once the memory card has been ejec-
ted from the system the function button is greyed out. Sound : make sound and volume settings page 42. Screen : make screen settings. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Time and date : set the time and date. Language : select the desired language for text and voice output. Keypad : select the required layout (alphabetical or keyboard layout). More keypad languages : select additional keypad languages. Units : sets units of measurement for displays in the vehicle. Bluetooth : make settings relating to Bluetooth page 39. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. Display off (in 10 s) : when this function is activated, the screen switches off if no button is press-
ed on the infotainment system for about ten seconds. The screen is switched back on by touch-
ing the screen or pressing an infotainment button. Brightness : select the brightness of the screen. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Show clock in standby mode : the screen shows the current time when the infotainment system is in standby mode. Time : to set the current time. Time format : select the format for the time display (12 or 24-hour). Summer (DST) : summer time is activated. Date : set the current date. Date format : to select the format for the date display (DD.MM.YY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY). Distance, Speed, Temperature, Volume, Consumption and Pressure. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 40 ment system works properly. It is important that the correct date and time are set in the vehicle to ensure the infotain-
Function button: effect Factory settings : restoring the factory settings will erase entered data and settings depending on which option has been selected. System information : displays the system information (serial number, hardware and software versions). Copyright : copyright information. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 41 42 Introduction Sound and volume settings First read and observe the introductory information given on page 42. Changes are automatically stored when a menu is closed. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Adjusting settings . Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Adjusting settings Press the SOUND infotainment button. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button and then select Sound to open the Sound setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Max. switch-on volume : define the maximum volume at switch-on. Announcements : to set the output volume for announcements (e.g. traffic announcements). Speed-dep. vol. (GALA) : define the scope of the speed-dependent volume control. The audio vol-
ume is automatically increased as the vehicle speed increases. Audio lower. : set how much the volume of the infotainment system should be reduced by when the ParkPilot is active. AUX volume : to set the output volume for audio sources that are connected via the AUX-IN mul-
timedia socket (Quiet, Medium or Loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources. BT audio : to set the output volume for audio sources connected via Bluetooth (quiet, medium or loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sour-
ces. Function button: effect Bass - Mid- Treble : sets the tonal quality (Bass - Mid - Treble). Balance or Balance - Fader : set the sound focus. The crosshair shows the where the sound is currently focused in the car's interior. To move the sound focus, touch the required position on the interior view or use the arrow buttons to change the position. To place the focus of sound at the centre of the interior view, touch the function button between the arrows. Volume : to make volume settings. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources If you need to increase the output volume of an ex-
ternal audio source, first lower the base volume on the infotainment system. If the sound from the external audio source is too quiet, increase the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Medium or Loud. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 42 If the sound from the connected external audio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Me-
dium or Quiet. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 43 AM A2DP AUX-IN AVRCP Abbreviation Definition Abbreviations DIN DRM EON FM HFP MP3 RDS TP VBR WMA Generic technology for the transmission of audio signals via Bluetooth (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile). Amplitude modulation (medium wave, MW). Auxiliary audio input. Universal technology for remote control of audio sources via Bluetooth (Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile). German Standards Authority (Deutsches Institut fr Normung). Digital rights management. Supporting of other networks (enhanced other network). Frequency modulation (very high frequency, VHF). Wireless telephony (hands-free profile). Format for compressing audio files. Radio data system. Traffic news function (traffic program). Variable bit rate. Format for compressing audio files. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 44 Bluetooth Function buttons (soft keys) External data storage device PHONE main menu . 34 USB . 26 External audio sources . 27 Adjusting playback volume . 42 BT audio . 28 F Factory settings . 40 FM . 12, 44 Frequency band Profiles . 31 Settings . 39 Bluetooth audio . 28 Browsing lists . 9 BT audio . 28 Buttons . 8 Infotainment system . 6 AM . 12 Changing . 12 FM . 12 Selecting . 12 Function buttons . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Operating . 8 Radio main menu . 12 Index A AM . 12 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 AUX-IN . 27 AUX-IN socket . 27 External audio sources . 27 Selecting . 23 AUX-IN socket . 27 B Base volume . 8 Adjusting . 8 Muting . 8 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Cannot be read . 25 Ejecting . 25 Faulty . 25 Inserting . 25 Mode . 25 Selecting . 23 Checkboxes . 8 Control elements (infotainment system) . 6 Copyright . 20 Information . 41 Cursor . 10 D Dialling a number . 36 During a telephone call . 35 E Eject Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Infotainment buttons . 6, 7 Input window . 10 Interference from a mobile telephone . 7 Introduction . 3 K Keypad . 10 M Main menu G GALA . 42 H Hard keys . 7 Hard keys (infotainment system) . 6 I Ignition off MEDIA . 22 PHONE . 34 RADIO . 12 Settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound . 42 C Call lists . 37 CD see CD . 25 EON . 17, 44 Explosion risk areas AUX-IN socket . 27 Bit rate . 20 Telephone . 31 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 MEDIA Index 45 P PHONE O On-screen keypad . 10 Operation Bluetooth audio . 28 CD audio data . 20 CD cannot be read . 25 CD faulty . 25 CD mode . 25 Changing media source . 23 Changing tracks . 24 Copyright . 20 Displays . 22 Displays and symbols . 23 Ejecting a CD . 25 External data storage device connected to Additional display information . 11 Adjusting the volume . 8 Browsing lists . 9 Checkboxes . 8 Entries . 10 Function buttons . 8 Infotainment buttons . 7 Input window . 10 Muting . 8 On-screen keypad . 10 PHONE . 30, 34 RADIO . 12 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Scrolling . 9 Slider . 9 Switching on and off . 7 Touchscreen . 8 USB port . 26 Fast forward . 24 Fast reverse . 24 Function buttons . 22 Inserting a CD . 25 Inserting memory card . 26 Main menu . 22 Media mode . 20 Media source selection menu . 23 Memory card cannot be read . 26 MP3 files . 20 Playback modes . 22 Playing order . 21 Playlists . 21 Preparing for removal . 26 Random play (Mix) . 22 Removing memory card . 26 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements . 20 Restrictions . 21 Scan function (SCAN) . 22 Selecting storage devices . 23 Selecting track . 24 Settings . 28 Track information . 23 Track list . 24 WMA files . 20 Media sources . 23 AUX-IN . 23 CD . 23 Memory card . 23 Selecting . 23 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution A2DP . 31 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 Bluetooth profiles . 31 Bluetooth settings . 39 Call lists . 37 Connecting via infotainment system . 32 Contacts . 36 Description of functions . 31 Dialling . 36 Displays and symbols . 35 During a telephone call . 35 Entering telephone number . 36 Explosion risk areas . 31 Function buttons . 34 General information . 31 HFP . 31 Main menu . 34 Mobile telephone pairing . 32 Pairing via infotainment system . 32 Settings . 38 Speed dial buttons . 38 Telephone book . 36 Telephone control . 30 Telephone control system . 34 User profile settings . 39 Cannot be read . 26 Inserting . 26 Preparing memory card for removal . 26 Removing . 26 Selecting . 23 Muting . 8 N Numbers AUX-IN . 27 CD . 25 External data storage device (USB) . 26 MEDIA . 22 Memory card . 22 RADIO . 12 Track . 24 Dialling . 36 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Memory card Playback 46 Screen Scan function (SCAN) MEDIA . 22 RADIO . 16 see Memory card . 26 Setting date . 40 Settings Operating . 8 Screen (infotainment system) . 6 Scrolling . 9 SD card AM . 18 Bluetooth . 39 Defaults . 40 Factory settings . 40 FM . 18 Main menu . 40 Media . 28 Menu and system settings . 40 PHONE . 38 Radio . 18 Sound . 42 System . 40 User profile . 39 Volumes . 42 Setting time . 40 SETUP Pop-up windows . 8 Q Quick reference guide . 3 R RADIO . 12 AM settings . 18 Display of station names . 13 Displays and symbols . 13 EON . 17 FM settings . 18 Frequency change . 12 Function buttons . 12 Main menu . 12 Radio mode . 12 Radio text . 16 RDS . 13 Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting stations . 14 Settings . 18 Setting station frequency . 14 Setting stations . 14 Station buttons . 14 Station list . 14 Station tracking via RDS . 13 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing stations . 14 TP (traffic program) . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news . 17 Radio text (RDS) . 16 Random play (Mix) . 22 RDS . 13 Automatic station tracking . 13 Radio text . 16 RDS Regional . 13 TP (traffic program) . 17 Repeat . 22 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements for CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting . 14 Setting . 14 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing . 14 Station search . 16 Station tracking . 13 Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Switching off . 7 Switching on . 7 T Telephone control Infotainment system . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Radio main menu . 12 Sound focus (balance, fader) . 42 Sound settings (treble, bass) . 42 Speed-dependent volume . 42 Speed dial buttons . 38 Station buttons . 14 Station names . 13 Stations CDs . 20 memory cards . 20 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Rotary/push knobs (infotainment system) . 6 S Safety information see Settings . 40 Slider . 9 Soft keys Media . 22 Radio . 16 Infotainment system . 3 see PHONE . 30 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 SCAN Index 47 USB Volume User profile V VHF Telephone control system (PHONE) see FM . 44 Settings . 39 see TP (traffic program) . 17 Connecting an external data storage device . 26 Disconnecting . 26 Not readable . 26 U Unit buttons . 7 Switching off . 33 Text input . 10 Things to note AUX operation . 27 Displays . 11 Volume reduction . 7 Timeout . 7 Touchscreen (infotainment system) . 6 TP (traffic program) EON . 17 Switching on and off . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Track list . 24 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news Adjusting . 8 Base volume . 8 Determining for external audio sources . 42 Speed-dependent volume increase (GALA) . 42 Traffic announcements . 42 Volume distribution (balance, fader) . 42 Volume reduction . 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 48
1 2 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.99 MiB | / October 09 2014 |
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution L40SK2 L41SK2 L52SK2 Composition Touch, Composition Colour:
Radio Stand: 21.08.2013 Englisch: 11.2013 Artikel-Nr.: 142.5R6.RCT.20 1425R6RCT20 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution ment. NOTICE the next page. DANGER CAUTION WARNING Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation on the protection of the environ-
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to slight or se-
vere injuries if you do not observe the warn-
ing. Texts with this symbol indicate situations which could cause damage to the vehicle or ve-
hicle equipment if you do not observe the warning. er, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concern-
ing any term. Symbols like these refer you to warnings within the same section or on a given page. They draw your attention to possi-
ble risks of accident or injury and explain how they can be avoided. Cross reference to information about pos-
sible damage to your vehicle within the same section or on a given page. Description of symbols Refers to a section within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes that should always be observed. Indicates that the section is continued on Indicates the end of a section. Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible. Indicates a registered trademark. Howev-
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which will lead to fatal or severe in-
juries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Volkswagen AG works continuously to develop and further improve all models. Please understand that we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifications at any time. The data provided con-
cerning scope of delivery, appearance, perform-
ance, dimensions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and vehicle functions are all correct at the time of going to print. Some of the equipment described might not yet be available in a particular vehicle (information can be provided by your local Volkswagen dealership), and some equipment may not be available in certain countries. No legal com-
mitment may be inferred from the information, illus-
trations or descriptions in this manual. No part of this manual may be reprinted, repro-
duced or translated without the written permission of Volkswagen AG. All rights under the laws of copyright are expressly reserved by Volkswagen AG. Subject to alteration and amendment. Printed in Germany. Volkswagen AG 2013 This paper was bleached without the use of chlorine. FCC Compliance Statement [Level 4]
<North America>
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turn-ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution:
Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
<Canada>
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause Interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION MODEL L40SK2 L41SK2 L52SK2 Dimensions (mm) W Dimensions (mm) H Dimensions (mm) D 297.2 295.7 275.8 159.0 120.8 155.5 205.2 209.5 201.6 Weight (KG) 1.81 1.61 1.58 Power Requirement 9V~18V 9V~18V 9V~18V Power Consumption 25W * 4CH 25W * 4CH 25W * 4CH Bluetooth Specification Standard Bluetooth Version 2.1 Frequency Range 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz Output Power (Max.)
+4 dBm Max. 3 2 3 6 7 Index . 45 Abbreviations . 44 Table of Contents About this manual . Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system . 30 Description of telephone control system . 34 Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound and volume settings . 42 Audio mode Radio mode . 12 Media mode . 20 Introduction Before using the unit for the first time . Safety information for the infotainment system . Overview of the control elements . General information on operating the unit . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Table of Contents 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 1425R6RCT20 1 of the equipment described might not be fitted in your vehicle. Your Volkswagen dealership can pro-
vide more information on this. All details provided in this manual correspond to the information available at the time of going to print and apply only to factory-fitted infotainment systems. Due to continuous technical improvement of the infotainment system and possible updates to the unit's software, the displays and functions on the infotainment system may differ from the details given in this manual. No claims may be derived from the differing details, illustrations or descrip-
tions. Please ensure that this manual is in the vehicle if you lend or sell the vehicle to someone else. About this manual An alphabetical index is included at the end of this manual. A list of abbreviations explains technical abbre-
viations and terms. Directions and positions (e.g. right, left, front, rear) are normally relative to the vehicle's direction of travel. Illustrations help with orientation and should be regarded as a general guide. In right-hand drive vehicles the controls may sometimes be different to those displayed in illus-
trations or described in the text. All equipment and models are described without indicating whether the equipment is optional or specific to the model type. This means that some CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 2 page 40. WARNING WARNING Introduction Safety information for the infotainment system Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Operating the infotainment sys-
tem can distract you from the road. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Setting the volume too high may damage your hearing. This also applies even if you are only exposed to high volumes for short periods. Before using the unit for the first time Before using the infotainment system for the first time, carry out the following steps. This will enable you to use the infotainment system safely and make full use of the functions it provides:
Observe safety notes page 3. Familiarise yourself with the controls for the infotainment system page 7. In the System setup, reset the infotainment system to its original condition (factory settings) Use suitable data storage devices for media mode page 20. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution External devices that are placed loose in the vehicle or not properly secured can be flung though the interior and cause injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. You should never position or attach an ex-
ternal device on a door, on the windscreen or above or near to the areas marked AIRBAG on the steering wheel, the dash panel and the seat backrests, or between these areas and the vehicle occupants. External devices can cause serious injury in an accident, especial-
ly when the airbags deploy. The volume level may suddenly change when you switch audio source or connect a new audio source. Reduce the base volume before switching audio source or connecting a new audio source. The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. Opening the housing on a CD player can lead to injuries from invisible laser radiation. CD players should only be repaired by a qualified workshop. Connecting leads for external devices may obstruct the driver. Arrange the connecting leads so that they do not obstruct the driver. The infotainment system can be damaged by incorrect insertion of a storage device or inser-
tion of an incompatible storage device. Connecting, inserting or removing a storage device while the vehicle is in motion can dis-
tract you from the road and lead to accidents. WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 3 NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE (Continued) NOTICE (Continued) Only clean 12 cm standard CDs should be used. The vehicle loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound is distor-
ted. The CD drive can be damaged by any foreign objects attached to a storage device, and by ir-
regularly shaped storage devices. Do not affix stickers or other items to the data storage device. Stickers may peel off and damage the CD drive. Do not use printable data storage devi-
ces. Coatings and prints may peel off and damage the drive. Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-
larly shaped CDs or DVDs. Do not insert DVD Plus discs, dual discs or flip discs, as these are thicker than nor-
mal CDs. When inserting a memory card, ensure that it is correctly positioned page 20. Applying force may destroy the memory card slot's locking mechanism. Only use suitable memory cards. When inserting and removing a CD, always hold it flat and at a right angle to the front of the unit. Inserting or removing a CD at an angle to the drive can lead to scratching page 20. Inserting a second CD while a CD is already in the CD drive or being ejected can destroy the CD drive in the unit. Always wait until the CD is completely ejected!
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 4 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 5 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 6 2 11 7 7 8 8 9 10 Introduction is available from the local authorities. Due to country-specific legislation, certain functions cannot be selected on the screen Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle loudspeakers. when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information General information on operating the unit Not all listed function buttons and functions may be available due to the device software used in your market. The equipment is not faulty if a function button is missing from the screen. In some vehicles equipped with ParkPilot, the volume of the current audio source is auto-
matically lowered when reverse gear is engaged. Volume reduction can be set in the Sound setup menupage 42. Changes to settings may cause the display content to vary and some aspects of the infotainment sys-
tem operation to differ from the descriptions given in this manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons . Switching on and off . Adjusting base volume . Operating function buttons and displays on the screen . Selecting list entries and browsing lists . Input windows with on-screen keypad . Additional display information and display options . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Infotainment buttons This manual uses a button symbol with blue con-
tent and the term infotainment button to refer to buttons on the infotainment system, e.g. the info-
tainment button MEDIA . Infotainment buttons are operated either by press-
ing them or by pressing and holding. Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons information on page 7. After switching on, the system starts at the last se-
lected volume setting, provided that this does not exceed the preselected maximum switch-on vol-
ume page 42, Sound and volume settings. Depending on the unit version and the country, the infotainment system may switch off automatically when the engine is switched off or the vehicle key Rotary/push knobs The left-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 is re-
ferred to as the volume control or the on/off switch. The right-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 4 is re-
ferred to as the setting knob. Switching on and off information on page 7. To switch the infotainment system on or off man-
ually, briefly press the rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 . Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly touch-
ing the touchscreen is sufficient to operate First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory the infotainment system. Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 7 other vehicle. switching the infotainment system back on. on page 3 and the introductory information The infotainment system is permanently linked to the vehicle. It cannot be used in an-
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected, the ignition must be switched on before First read and observe the safety warnings on page 7. Adjusting base volume Any media source currently being played is stop-
ped while the infotainment system is muted. ap-
pears on the display. is removed from the ignition lock. If the infotain-
ment system is switched on again, it will switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes
(switch-off delay). Function: action Increasing the volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 clockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel Booklet Owner's manual. Decreasing volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anticlockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Changes to the base volume are indicated by a bar on the screen. During this time the infotain-
ment system cannot be operated. It is possible to preset certain volume settings and adjustments page 42. Muting the infotainment system Turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anti-
clockwise until is displayed. OR: press the MUTE infotainment system but-
ton1) Fig. 1 2 . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Operating function buttons and displays on the screen duce the volume again before switching to another audio source. If the base volume has been considerably in-
creased to play a certain audio source, re-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour 1) Depending on the unit version. 8 B A C OK
...
+ / -
... / ... Selecting list entries and browsing lists Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be selected. Overview of displays and function buttons Displays and function buttons: action and effect In the title bar, the currently selected menu and any other possible function buttons are displayed. Touch to open a further menu. Move the crosshair across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. OR: touch the desired position on the screen, the crosshair moves to this position. Touch to move up one level at a time from certain lists. Touch to move up one level at a time to the main menu from a submenu or to undo in-
puts made. Touch to open a pop-up window (option window), displaying further setting options. Some functions or displays are marked with a checkbox and are activated or deacti-
vated by touching this box. Touch to confirm an input or selection. Touch to close a pop-up window or an input window. Touch to change settings incrementally. Move the slider across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Browsing lists (scrolling) If there are more items available in a list view than can be displayed on the screen, function buttons for scrolling or a scroll bar are displayed on the right of the screen Fig. 3. Browsing lists line-by-line: touch the or function button briefly. Browsing lists page-by-page: briefly touch the screen above or below the scroll marker. Browsing long lists quickly page-by-page: touch and hold the screen above or below the scroll marker. To quickly scan through a long list, place your finger on the scroll marker and move it over the screen without losing contact. Lift your finger off the screen when you reach the desired position. List entries can be opened by touching them di-
rectly on the screen or by using the setting knob Fig. 1 4 . Marking and selecting list entries with the setting knob Turn the setting knob to mark each consecutive list entry with a selection box so you can browse through the list. Press the setting knob to select the marked list entry. Fig. 3 List entries settings menu information on page 7. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 9 Input windows with on-screen keypad First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 4 Input window with on-screen keyboard information on page 7. Input windows with on-screen keyboard allow you to enter text, such as an entry name for storing a destination or a search term for searching in long lists. Not all of the function buttons listed here are avail-
able in all countries and for all topics. Subsequent chapters only explain those functions that differ from the general view described here. Overview of function buttons Function buttons: action and effect The input line with the cursor is located on the left in the top line of the screen *. All inputs are dis-
played here. Input windows for free text input An input window for free text entry allows any let-
ter, number and special character to be entered in any combination. Touching the OK function button applies the se-
quence of characters currently displayed in the window. Input windows for selecting a stored entry It is only possible to select a sequence of letters, numbers and special characters that matches a stored entry. Every time a character is entered, a destination corresponding to the specifications is proposed in the input line. When terms are made up of more than one word, the space must be entered as well. If fewer than 99 entries are available, the number of remaining entries is displayed after the input line Fig. 4 2 . Touching this function button displays a list of these remaining entries. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Press and hold to open a pop-up window with special characters based on the letter shown. Touch the desired character to enter it. Some special characters can also be written out
(e.g. AE for ). Touch to switch between upper and lower case. Touch to enter a space. Touch to accept the suggestion in the input line and close the input window. Touch to delete characters in the input line from right to left. Press and hold to delete several characters at once. Touch to close the input window. 123... : touch to open the input window for numbers and special characters. ABC... : touch to go back to the input window for letters. Displays the number and opens the list of entries corresponding to the specifications that are still available. Letters/numbers Touch to insert the character in the input line. Composition Touch, Composition Colour Letters and OK 10 1 2 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory The displays that appear on the screen can vary depending on the settings, and may differ from those described here. Displays such as the current time and the current outside temperature can be displayed on the screen in the status bar. All displays appear only after the infotainment sys-
tem has completed start-up. Additional display information and display options information on page 7. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 11 with a window aerial. 12 13 14 14 16 16 17 17 18 Introduction RADIO main menu Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehicles Multi-storey car parks, tunnels, high buildings and mountains can impair radio reception. Audio mode Radio mode Basic information on use page 7 Menu and system settings (SETUP) page 40 Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
RADIO main menu . RDS radio data service . Station buttons . Selecting, setting and storing stations . Scan function (SCAN) . Radio text . TP function (traffic program) . Incoming traffic announcement . FM/AM settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Changes the displayed station button group by touching the function button. Opens the list of currently receivable radio stations page 14. Opens the frequency dial for the selected frequency band page 15. Opens the settings menu for the currently activated frequency band (FM or AM) page 18. Function buttons in the RADIO main menu Function button: effect 1 Selecting the frequency band Select the required frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Fig. 5 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 6 Radio mode station list 12
< / >
Function button: effect a) Varies by country and unit version. SCAN 1... to 12... RDS radio data service A RDS offa) TP No TP Possible displays and symbols Display: meaning Browses through the available or stored stations. Setting for the arrow buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on page 16. Station buttons for storing stations page 14. Updates the station list (AM frequency band) page 15. Displays station frequency or station name, and also possibly radio text. Station name and radio text are only displayed when RDS is available and activated page 13. The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 18. TP traffic news is activated and can be received page 17. No traffic news station can be received. The radio station is stored to a station button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Station name and automatic station tracking If RDS is available, station names can be dis-
played in the RADIO main menu and in the FM station list. FM radio stations may occasionally or continuously broadcast different content on different regional frequencies under the same station name (e.g. Ra-
dio 2). By default, automatic station tracking always switches to the currently selected station's frequen-
cy that offers the best reception, as the vehicle travels from one area to the next. As a result, you may lose the regional programme you are listening to. Automatic frequency changing and automatic sta-
tion tracking can be deactivated in the FM setup page 18. RDS (radio data system) is a radio data service which enables additional FM services, such as the display of station names, automatic station track-
ing, radio text and TP traffic news (TP). RDS is not supported by all units and is not availa-
ble everywhere or on every FM radio station. RDS can be deactivated in some country and unit versions page 18. Without RDS it is not possible to use radio data services. Fig. 7 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 8 Radio mode station list Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 13 Fig. 9 RADIO main menu Changing station button group Station buttons Selecting stations via the station buttons information on page 12. The radio stations are responsible for the content of the information sent. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory In the RADIO main menu, you can store stations from the currently selected frequency band on 12 consecutively numbered function buttons. These function buttons are called station buttons. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch the station button that shows the required station. When a stored station is selected via the station buttons, it will only be played if it can be received at your current location. Touch the Fig. 9 1 function button. The station buttons are displayed in groups of four function buttons
( 1 ... to 4 ... , 5 ... to 8 ... and 9 ... to 12 ... ). If radio text is shown instead of the station buttons, touch radio text in order to show the station buttons. See Storing stations page 15. Selecting, setting and storing stations Storing stations to station but-
tons Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 11 Radio mode station list Fig. 10 RADIO main menu Displaying station buttons 14 Updating the station list Displaying the frequency dial on page 3 and the introductory information Adjusting the frequency in stages Tuning to a station frequency manually Selecting stations from a station list Selecting stations Selecting stations using arrow buttons
< / >
First read and observe the safety warnings on page 12. Touch the < or > Fig. 10 function button. The unit only switches to stored or receivable stations, depending on what settings have been made for the arrow buttons. Setting for the ar-
row buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Search through the list and touch the required station to select it. To close the station list, touch the Fig. 11 function button. In the FM frequency band the station list is updated automatically. In the AM frequency band, touch the Fig. 11 function button to up-
date the station list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Turn the setting knob one stop further. OR: touch the Fig. 10 function button. Turn the setting knob. OR: touch the arrow buttons to the left or the right of the frequency band. Touch one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. The next receivable station is set automatically. OR: press and hold one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. When you release the button, the unit automatically tunes to the next available station. OR: place your finger on the slider in the frequency dial and drag it along the dial. Briefly press the setting knob. Manual frequency selection is also closed if you select a station with a station button. The frequency band closes automatically after a period of inactivity. Press and hold the desired station button Fig. 10 until a tone is soun-
ded. The station currently playing is then stored on that station button. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Stations already stored on a station button are marked in the station list with the Fig. 11 symbol. Select the desired station by pressing and holding on the screen. Touch the button to which you wish this station to be assigned. A signal tone sounds, and the station is then stored on this station but-
ton. Repeat the process to store further stations from the station list. All stored stations can be deleted individually or together in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Storing a station from the station list to a station button Storing the current station to a station button Quickly browsing through the frequency band Hiding the frequency band Deleting stored stations Storing stations Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 15 Starting the scan function Stopping the scan function First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Scan function (SCAN) information on page 12. When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current frequency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each. SCAN appears on the display. Fixed station names are indicated by a dot to each side of the name. The fixed text is adopted for all the station buttons on which the corresponding station is stored. Stopping station names scrolling (FM frequency) Some radio stations transmit a very long station name, which is shown on the screen as a scrolling text. To fix the text that is currently displayed to the screen, touch the station name and hold until a tone is sounded. Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the function button and then select SCAN . Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the SCAN function button to end the scan function at the station arrived at. Manually selecting a station with the station buttons also stops the scan function. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch displayed radio text Fig. 12. Touch displayed radio text Fig. 13. In the FM setup menu, deactivate the Radio text function button by touch-
ing it page 18. Fig. 12 RADIO main menu information on page 12. Hiding station buttons Displaying station buttons Switching off radio text per-
manently The station buttons can be hidden to enlarge the display area for the radio text Fig. 13. Some RDS-compatible stations also broadcast ad-
ditional text information known as radio text. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 13 Radio mode: radio text is visible Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio text 16 Fig. 15 Radio mode: station list with TP display TP function (traffic program) First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 14 RADIO main menu with TP display information on page 12. In FM mode, the selected station must support the TP function. After the TP function is switched on, if you change via the station buttons or manual se-
lection to a station that does not support the TP function, traffic news monitoring will not be possi-
ble (display: No TP). If the currently selected traffic news station can no longer be received, No TP is also displayed and you will have to start a manual station search page 14. In AM mode or media mode, the unit will always automatically tune to a traffic news station in the background, provided that a TP station is availa-
ble. This procedure may take some time. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic news monitoring with the TP function is only possible if a traffic news station is available. Traffic news stations are indicated in the RADIO main menu and in the station list by TP Fig. 14 and Fig. 15. Some stations that do not broadcast their own traf-
fic news support the TP function through a link to a traffic news station (EON). Switching the TP function on and off In the FM/AM setup menu, activate or deac-
tivate the Traffic program (TP) function button by touching it page 18. If the station that is currently selected does not support the TP function, No TP will be shown in the top right of the screen. Activated TP function and station selection While traffic news monitoring is on, TP is displayed at the top right in audio mode Fig. 14. Traffic an-
nouncements broadcast by the current station or a linked traffic news station will interrupt the current audio mode. During the traffic announcement a pop-up window is displayed and, if required, the radio is switched to the traffic news station (EON) for the duration of the traffic announcement. The media mode is paused and the volume is ad-
justed to the preset level page 42. Incoming traffic announcement information on page 12. Incoming traffic announcements will interrupt the active audio mode. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 17 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory FM/AM settings information on page 12. The traffic announcement volume setting can be adjusted with the volume control Fig. 1 1 . The adjusted volume setting will be applied to sub-
sequent announcements. FM setup Select the FM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the FM setup menu. Touch the Cancel function button to end the traffic announcement. The TP function remains ac-
tivated. OR: touch the Deactivate function button to end the current traffic announcement and permanently switch off the TP function. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 17. Radio text : radio text is activated page 16. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Radio Data System (RDS) a): the radio data system (RDS) is deactivated page 13. If the checkbox is deactivated, the traffic program (TP) and radio text functions are not available. Alternative frequency (AF) : automatic station tracking is activated. If the checkbox is deactiva-
ted, automatic station tracking is switched off. The RDS Regional function button is then inac-
tive (greyed out). Fixed : the unit only switches to alternative frequencies for the selected station that broadcast the same regional service. Automatic : the unit always switches to the station's frequency that currently offers the best reception. As a result, regional programmes may be interrupted. a) Varies by country and unit version. AM setup Select the AM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the AM setup menu. All : all stored stations will be deleted (FM 1, FM 2, FM 3). To delete individual stations, selected the desired preset list FM 1 , FM 2 or FM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. RDS Regional : defines the setting for automatic station tracking with RDS page 13. Advanced setup : settings for the RDS radio data services. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 18 All : all stored stations will be deleted (AM 1, AM 2, AM 3). To delete individual stations, select the desired preset list AM 1 , AM 2 or AM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 19 27 26 28 28 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 Introduction Media mode This product is subject to certain intellectual property rights and copyrights owned by the Media sources are audio sources containing au-
dio files on various different storage devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external MP3 player). These au-
Microsoft Corporation. The use or distribution of this type of technology outside this product re-
quires a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft company. dio files can be played by the infotainment system from its corresponding drives or audio input sock-
ets (internal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN socket etc.). Copyright Audio and video files stored on data storage devi-
ces are normally subject to national and interna-
tional copyright laws. Observe legal requirements. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Data storage device and file requirements . Playing order of files and folders . MEDIA main menu . Changing the media source . Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu . Selecting tracks from the track list . Inserting or ejecting a CD . Inserting or removing a memory card . External data storage device connected to USB port . External audio source connected to the AUX-
IN socket . Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth . Media settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Requirements for playing in the unit CD Digital Audio specification . MP3 files (.mp3) with bit rates of between 32 and 320 kbit/s or with variable bit rate. WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono/stereo without copy protec-
tion. Playlists in the formats PLS, M3U and WPL. Playlists no larger than 20 kB and containing no more than 1,000 entries. File name and path information not longer than 256 charac-
ters. Media source Audio CDs (up to 80 minutes). CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW audio data CDs up to max. 700 MB (mega-
bytes) with the file systems ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 SD and MMC memory cards with the file systems FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, VFAT or exFAT up to max. 2 GB (gigabytes), SDHC memory cards up to max. 32 GB and SDXC memory cards up to max. 2 TB (terabytes). Data storage device and file requirements information on page 20. Factory-fitted CD drives conform to safety class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/ VDE 0837. The infotainment system only accepts standard 12 cm CDs, and memory cards measuring 32 mm x 24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm. The supported file formats listed are collectively re-
ferred to below as audio files. A CD containing audio files of these types is referred to as an au-
dio data CD. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 20 Do not use memory card adapters. Audio file playback via Bluetootha). Media source AUX External audio source. Playing order of files and folders No liability can be accepted for damaged or lost files on the storage devices. Requirements for playing in the unit Playback of external audio sources via 3.5 mm jack plug page 27. The external media player must support the A2DP Blue-
tooth profile page 28. The reading time may vary considerably depend-
ing on the condition of the storage device (copying and deleting actions), folder structure and file type. Playlists only determine a certain playing order. There are no files stored in a playlist. The unit will not play a playlist if the files are not stored on the storage device at the locations referred to by the playlist (relative file paths). a) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Restrictions and notes Contamination, exposure to high temperatures and mechanical damage can render storage devices unusable. Please observe the manufacturer's in-
structions. Variations in the quality of storage devices from dif-
ferent manufacturers can lead to problems during playback. Please observe copyright laws. The unit may be unable to read individual tracks or the entire storage device due to the storage devi-
ce's configuration or the devices and programs used for recording. Information about the best ways to create audio files and configure storage devices (compression rate, ID3 tag etc.) can be found online. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio files on storage devices are often sorted by folders and playlists to determine a certain playing order. Tracks, folders and playlists on a storage device are each sorted by name in alphanumeric order. The illustration shows a typical audio data CD that contains tracks , folders and subfolders Fig. 16. The tracks are played in the following order1):
1. 2. Tracks 1 and 2 in the CD's root directory Tracks 3 and 4 in the first folder F1 in the CD's root directory Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of the folder F1 Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of the subfolder F1.1 Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of the folder F1 Tracks 8 and 9 in the second folder F2 The playing order can be altered by selecting different playback modes page 22. Fig. 16 Possible structure on an audio data CD information on page 20. 1) The Mix/Repeat including subfolders function must be activated page 40 in the Media setup menu. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 21 3. 4. 5. 6. MEDIA main menu the track selection menu page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Playlists are not played automatically. In-
stead they must be specifically selected via Function buttons in the MEDIA main menu Function button: effect Fig. 17 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. In the MEDIA main menu, various media sources can be selected and played. Press the MEDIA infotainment button to open the MEDIA main menu Fig. 17. Playback of the media source that was most re-
cently played resumes from the point where it stop-
ped. The media source currently playing is indicated at the bottom left in the function button 1 . The MEDIA main menu will indicate if no media source is available. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to select a different media source page 23. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : Bluetooth audio page 28. Opens the track list page 24. Changes track when in media mode page 24 Playback stops. The function button changes to page 24. Playback is resumed. The function button changes to page 24. Opens the Media setup menu page 28. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Composition Touch, Composition Colour
< / >
22 1 A SCAN Function button: effect Changing the media source Displays and symbols in the MEDIA main menu Display: meaning B RDS offa) TP No TP a) Varies by market and unit version. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on. To start the scan func-
tion, press setting knob Fig. 1 4 or open the track list and touch the SCAN function button. Display of track information (CD text , ID3 tag with MP3 files). Audio CDs: track and track number corresponding to the track order on the CD are dis-
played. Audio files: artist name, album name and track name are displayed. Track playing time and remaining playing time in minutes and seconds. The remaining playing time displayed may differ for audio files with variable bit rate (VBR). The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 12. TP is activated and can be received page 12. No traffic news station can be received. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In the MEDIA main menu, press the MEDIA in-
fotainment button as often as required to switch between the available media sources. OR: in the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 18 1 function button and select the desired media source. Media sources not currently available are shown as inactive (grey) in the pop-up window. If a media source that has already been played is selected again, playback is resumed from the point that was last reached. Audio or audio data CD in the internal CD drive page 25. Memory card page 26. External data storage device connected to USB page 26. External audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. Bluetooth audio page 28. Optionally selectable media sources Function button: media source CD SD card USB AUX BT audio Fig. 18 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. The media source can also be changed in the Track list view page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
on page 3 and the introductory ings Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 23 Briefly touch the function button > once. Briefly touch the function button < twice. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory You can browse through the tracks of the media source that is currently playing using the arrow but-
tons. You cannot switch to playback from a playlist us-
ing the arrow keys. Playback from a playlist must be started manually via the track selection menu page 24, Selecting tracks from the track list. Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Fig. 19 MEDIA main menu Controlling playback via the MEDIA main menu Effect Action Briefly touch the function button < once. Goes to the start of the current track. If the track is short-
er than 3 seconds, the system goes to the start of the previous track. Goes to the start of the previous track. Changes from the first track to the last track on the storage device that is being played. Goes to the next track. Changes from the last track to the first track on the storage device that is being played. Fast reverse. Fast forward. Playback stops. The function button changes to . Playback is resumed. The function button changes to
. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Opening the track list In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button Fig. 19 to open the track list. The track that is currently playing is highlighted Fig. 20. Search through the track list and touch the de-
sired track. If track information is available, the track name is displayed instead of Track + No.. Press and hold the < function button. Press and hold the > function button. Briefly touch the function button once. Briefly touch the function button once. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory information on page 20. Selecting tracks from the track list Fig. 20 Track list from a media source Composition Touch, Composition Colour 24 A SCAN Overview of function buttons in the track list Function button: effect Opens the Sources menu. Touch to select a different media source. Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to change the media source. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : external media player connected via Bluetooth page 28. Touch the function button to open the parent folder of the current folder on the media source. The name of the current folder will be displayed to the right of the symbol. Starts playback at the first track. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. Closes track list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The internal CD drive can play audio CDs and au-
dio data CDs. When an audio CD without CD text is playing, only TITLE and the track number, corresponding to the playing order on the data medium, are displayed in the centre line of the screen. If the audio file CDs played contain additional track information (CD text , ID3 tag for MP3 files), it can be displayed on the screen. Inserting a CD Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. Push the CD into the CD slot only to the point where it is drawn in automatically. When the CD is inserted, playback will start au-
tomatically. Ejecting a CD In some countries, the vehicle key must be in the ignition lock of a cabriolet vehicle in order to eject a CD (anti-theft protection). Press the EJECT infotainment button. The CD in the drive will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 10 seconds. For safety reasons, the CD will be drawn back into the player if it is not removed within roughly 10 seconds, but the unit will not switch to CD mode. CD cannot be read or is faulty A message will be shown on the screen if the data on an inserted CD cannot be read or the CD is faulty. Inserting or ejecting a CD information on page 20. Tracks, folders and playlists can also be marked by turning the setting knob then loa-
Uneven road surfaces and strong vibrations can cause playback to jump. First read and observe the safety warn-
on page 3 and the introductory ings ded or opened up or opened by pressing the knob. Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 25 Vertical card slot Horizontal card slot back of CDs is disabled. ery time, contact a qualified workshop. Inserting a memory card Fig. 1 7 When the temperature inside the infotain-
ment system is too high, loading and play-
First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. If you insert a number of different CDs and receive the message Error: CD drive ev-
Inserting or removing a memory card information on page 20. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the lettering facing left (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the label facing up (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution If a memory card cannot be inserted, ensure that it is positioned correctly and is compatible with the unit. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the memory card. Removing a memory card The inserted memory card must be prepared for removal. In the MEDIA main menu touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove the SD card safely function but-
ton. OR: touch the Remove safely function button and then select SD card . Removing The connected storage device must be prepared before removal. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove safely function button and then select USB . Data media cannot be read The message No playable files available appears if the data on the connected storage de-
vice cannot be read. Once the memory card has been ejected from the system, a message is shown on the screen and the function button is greyed out. The memory card can then be removed. Press the inserted memory card. The memory card springs out of the slot. Remove the memory card. Memory card cannot be read If you insert a memory card containing data that cannot be read, the unit will not change to memory card mode after loading. A corresponding message is displayed. In some countries and with some equipment lev-
els, the vehicle may be fitted with a USB connec-
tion in the stowage compartment in the centre console. Booklet Owner's Manual, chapter Prac-
tical equipment. Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the data storage device. External data storage device connected to USB port information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 26 Fig. 21 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external storage device. Fig. 22 External audio source connected to AUX-
IN External audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The AUX-IN socket Fig. 1 6 can only be used with a 3.5 mm jack plug. The connected external audio source is played over the vehicle speakers and cannot be control-
led via the infotainment system. AUX shows on the screen when an external audio source is connected Fig. 22. Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN socket Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Connect the external audio source to the AUX-
IN socket. Information on operating an external audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket Action Selecting another audio source on the infotainment system. Stopping playback on the external audio source. Disconnecting the plug from the AUX-IN socket. Effect The external audio source continues to run in the background. The infotainment system remains in the AUX menu. The infotainment system switches to playback of the most recently played audio source. Start playback on the external audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 21 1 function button and select AUX . The output volume of the external audio source should be adjusted to the volume of the other au-
dio sources page 42. Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external audio source. Interference may occur if the external audio source is powered from the vehicles 12-volt Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 socket. 27 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth Fig. 23 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Touch the Find devices function button to con-
nect an external Bluetooth audio source for the first time. OR: touch the Paired devices function button to select an external Bluetooth audio source from the list. Continue the process by following the prompts on the infotainment system screen and in the dis-
play on the Bluetooth audio source. You may then have to start playback on the Blue-
tooth audio source manually. When playback on the Bluetooth audio source is stopped, the infotainment system remains in Blue-
tooth audio mode. Controlling playback The extent to which the Bluetooth audio source can be controlled via the infotainment system var-
ies depending on what Bluetooth audio source is connected. With media players that support the AVRCP Blue-
tooth profile, playback on the Bluetooth audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched to Bluetooth audio mode or to a different audio source. In addition, track display or track change is possible via the in-
fotainment system. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In Bluetooth audio mode, audio files from a Blue-
tooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone) that is connected via Bluetooth can be played over the vehicle loudspeakers (Bluetooth audio playback). Conditions The Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth profile. The Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be activated in the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Starting Bluetooth audio transfer Switch on Bluetooth visibility on the external Bluetooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone). Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Press the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the Fig. 23 1 function button and se-
lect BT audio . Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : memory card is ejected from the system and can then be safely removed page 26. Sound : sound settings page 42. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. Due to the large number of possible Blue-
tooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all described functions. Media settings information on page 20. source, e.g. key tones on a mobile telephone, to prevent interference noise and malfunctions. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Always switch off the warning and service tones on a connected Bluetooth audio Composition Touch, Composition Colour 28 Function button: effect Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Mix/Repeat including subfolders : subfolders will be included in the selected playback mode page 22. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 29 32 33 31 31 31 WARNING WARNING (Continued) Introduction area where the network is very weak or, in some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-
pass. This also means that no emergency calls can be made. Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-
correctly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This can cause injuries. While the vehicle is in motion, always se-
cure the mobile telephone properly outside the airbag deployment area. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
General information . Areas where special regulations apply . Bluetooth . Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system . Switching telephone control system off . The telephone functions described in the following section can be controlled via the infotainment sys-
tem if a mobile telephone that is switched on is paired and connected with the infotainment sys-
tem. The mobile telephone must support the Blue-
tooth function otherwise a connection cannot be made between the telephone and the infotainment system. If a mobile telephone is not connected to the info-
tainment system, the telephone control system cannot be used. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Carrying a mobile telephone that is switched on just next to a pacemaker may cause the pacemaker to malfunction. Maintain a gap of approximately 20 centi-
metres between the aerials of the mobile tele-
phone and the pacemaker, as mobile tele-
phones may affect the functioning of pace-
makers. Do not carry a mobile telephone in your breast pocket above your pacemaker when the telephone is switched on or in standby mode. If you suspect interference, switch off the mobile telephone immediately. Making telephone calls and operating the tel-
ephone control system while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road and lead to accidents. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Your call may be cut off or you may be un-
able to make calls if you are in an area with no mobile telephone network coverage, an The centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements if raised, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. High speeds, poor weather and poor road con-
ditions as well as the network quality may im-
pair telephone calls in the vehicle. Composition Touch, Composition Colour WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE 30 is available from the local authorities. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on First read and observe the introductory on information and safety warnings There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information When connecting the telephone control sys-
tem with a device using Bluetooth, read the device's operating manual for detailed safety infor-
mation. Use compatible Bluetooth products only. General information page 30. Areas where special regulations apply page 30. You may experience poor reception or may be cut off in areas where the signal is weak. Most electronic devices are shielded against high-
frequency signals. In rare cases, however, elec-
tronic devices may not be shielded against high-
frequency signals emitted by the telephone control system. This can cause interference. How the individual telephone menus are displayed depends on the mobile telephone being used. There may be differences. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Vehicle care and maintenance. Use compatible Bluetooth devices only. Informa-
tion on compatible Bluetooth products is available from your Volkswagen dealership or online. Follow the operating manual for your mobile tele-
phone and the instructions provided by the acces-
sory manufacturer. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the mobile telephone and mobile tele-
phone provision in areas with a risk of explosion. These areas are often clearly marked, but not al-
ways clude, for example:
Areas immediately around chemical pipelines and tanks. Lower decks of ships and ferries. The area around vehicles which run on liquid gas (such as propane or butane). Places where there are chemicals or particles such as flour, dust and metal powder in the air. All other places where the vehicle engine must be switched off. Your mobile telephone must always be switch-
ed off in areas where special regulations apply and when the use of mobile telephones is for-
bidden. The radiation produced by the mobile telephone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is used to connect a mobile telephone to the telephone control system fitted in a vehicle. A pairing process has to be carried out before the telephone control system can be used with a Bluetooth mobile telephone. Switch off the mobile telephone in areas with a risk of explosion!
First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Bluetooth page 30. in Introduction on page 30. They in-
Telephone control (PHONE) WARNING NOTICE 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 31 Music playback Bluetooth Advanced Audio Dis-
tribution Profile (A2DP):
Bluetooth profile for the transmission of ster-
eo-quality audio signals. Playback controls Bluetooth Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile (AVRCP):
Bluetooth profile for displaying track informa-
tion and control of playback in the mobile device. Some Bluetooth mobile telephones are detected and connected automatically when the ignition is switched on, if a connection already exists. For this to happen, the mobile telephone itself and the Bluetooth function in the telephone must be switched on and all active Bluetooth connections to other units must be disconnected. The Bluetooth connection is free of charge. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG, Inc. Bluetooth profiles When a mobile telephone is connected to the tele-
phone control system, data is exchanged via one of the Bluetooth profiles. Basic telephony Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile
(HFP):
If a mobile telephone is connected via HFP to the telephone control system, you can make calls wirelessly via the hands-free system. The vehicle's exterior aerial cannot be used with this. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehi-
cle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Entries have to be made on the mobile telephone keypad during the pairing process. The mobile tel-
ephone has to be at hand for this. Starting mobile telephone pairing Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Find telephone function button. OR:
Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Setup function button. Touch the Select telephone function button and then Find telephone . Once the search process is complete, the names of all Bluetooth devices found will be displayed on the screen. Select the mobile telephone to be paired from this list of Bluetooth devices and then select Hands-free telephone (HFP). The infotainment system and the mobile telephone are now connected. Further input may be required on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system to conclude the connection process. In order to operate a mobile telephone via the info-
tainment system, a single pairing process is re-
quired for both devices. Pairing should only be performed when the vehicle is stationary. Conditions Ignition is switched on. If necessary, disconnect any headsets from the mobile telephone. The Bluetooth function must be activated or set to visible on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system. The keypad lock on the mobile telephone has to be unlocked. Follow the operating manual for the mobile tele-
phone. The Bluetooth function is set to visible on the infotainment system for about 3 minutes after the ignition is switched on. Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system page 30. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Composition Touch, Composition Colour 32 ternet at www.volkswagen.com. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on You will find further information on pairing and connecting mobile telephones on the In-
Switching telephone control system off page 30. Pairing and connecting mobile telephones Several mobile telephones can be paired with the infotainment system, but only one mobile tele-
phone can be connected to the infotainment sys-
tem at a time. When you switch the infotainment system on, a connection is automatically set up with the mobile telephone that was connected last. If no connec-
tion can be set up with this mobile telephone, the telephone control system automatically attempts to set up a connection with the next mobile telephone in the list of paired devices. Bluetooth connections have a maximum range of 10 metres. Any active Bluetooth connection is in-
terrupted when this distance is exceeded. The con-
nection is automatically restored as soon as the device enters the Bluetooth range. If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mobile telephone. Depends on the mobile telephone:
Enter the PIN code that is then displayed on the infotainment system into the mobile telephone and confirm it. OR:
Compare the PIN code displayed on the info-
tainment system with the PIN code displayed on the mobile telephone. If the PIN code matches, it has to be confirmed on both devices. The PHONE main menu is displayed and the tele-
phone book and the call lists stored in the mobile telephone are loaded automatically once pairing has been completed. The time taken by the load-
ing process varies depending on the amount of da-
ta stored in the mobile telephone. This data is available on the infotainment system once the loading process is completed. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the ignition. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. The telephone control system is switched off and any active call is transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The telephone control system is not switched off if the vehicle key is left in the ignition lock after the engine is switched off. Once a set time has ex-
pired, a message appears on the infotainment sys-
tem screen informing you that the telephone con-
trol system will be switched off automatically. An active call will be transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The transfer of an active call from the tele-
phone control system to the mobile telephone can take up to approximately 10 seconds (depend-
ing on the mobile telephone being used). Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 33 34 35 36 36 37 38 38 39 39 Introduction PHONE main menu Some networks might not support all lan-
guage-dependent characters and services. Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle speakers. Description of telephone control system Some functions and settings are only available when the vehicle is stationary, and are not suppor-
ted by all mobile telephones. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
PHONE main menu . During a telephone call . Entering a telephone number . Telephone book menu (Contacts) . Call lists menu . Speed dial buttons . Telephone settings . Bluetooth settings . User profile settings . Up to 20 devices can be linked to the telephone control system. One device at a time can be con-
nected via the hands-free profile (HFP) or audio playback profile (A2DP) page 33. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Introduction to and safety information for tel-
ephone control system page 30 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Fig. 25 Incoming call data via the User profile setup menu page 39. The telephone book will be automati-
cally updated when the telephone is connected again (e.g. on the next journey). A maximum of 4 user profiles can be stored for mobile telephones in the telephone control system. If another mobile telephone is connected, the user profile which has not been used for the longest amount of time will be deleted automatically. Telephone control function buttons Press the PHONE infotainment button to open the PHONE main menu. Fig. 24 PHONE main menu Assignment to a user profile Telephone book data, call lists and stored speed dial buttons are assigned to a user profile and stor-
ed in the telephone control system. They are avail-
able when the mobile phone is connected with the telephone control system again. If, while connected to the radio, telephone book entries on the mobile telephone are changed, you can start a manual update of the telephone book First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 34 2 1 B A Function button: effect During a telephone call Telephone control displays and symbols Display: meaning The name of the mobile telephone network provider where the inserted SIM card or the SIM card of the paired mobile telephone is registered. Displays the telephone number or the stored name. The charge level of the paired mobile telephone. The signal strength of the current mobile telephone transmitter station. Name of the paired mobile telephone or the user profile in use. Touch to connect or pair an-
other mobile telephone. Speed dial buttons which can be used to store one telephone number from the telephone book each page 38. Opens the keypad to enter a telephone number page 36. Opens the telephone book in the paired mobile telephone page 36. Opens the call lists in the paired mobile telephone page 37. Opens the Telephone setup menu page 38. Touch to accept a call. Touch to end a call. OR: touch to reject an incoming call. Touch to mute the ring tone during a call or to switch the mute off. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch to make the call on the mobile telephone provision. Touch to switch off the microphone in the mobile telephone provision during a call ( func-
tion button changes to ). The conversation in the vehicle cannot be heard at the other end. appears on the display A . Touch the function button to switch on the microphone in the mobile telephone provision again. Touch to end a call. When a connection is made to a dialled telephone number, the PHONE main menu changes to the telephone call view Fig. 26. Displays and function buttons: action and effect a) First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 26 During a telephone call Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 35 B A Displays and function buttons: action and effect Entering a telephone number a) This function button is only displayed when the call is made on the mobile telephone. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 27 Entering a telephone number Possible functions Entering a telephone num-
ber In the PHONE main menu, press the function button.
: call is being made with the connected mobile telephone. Touch the function button to make the call on the mobile telephone provision.
: the microphone in the provision for mobile telephone is switched off.
: charge level of the paired mobile telephone. Display of call duration and telephone number or the stored name. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Enter the telephone number on the keypad. Touch the function button to dial the number. Enter the first letters of the required contact on the keypad. Possible en-
tries appear in the contact list. Browse through the contact list and touch the desired contact to make the call. Fig. 28 Contacts menu First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone book menu (Contacts) Selecting a contact from a list Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 29 Search window 36 Call lists menu Finding a contact in the search window Selecting a contact from a list Availability of telephone book menu depends on the mobile telephone being used. The telephone book can also be opened during an on-going telephone call. In the PHONE main menu, press the function button. It may take a few minutes after the first pairing process until the telephone book data1) from the paired mobile telephone is available on the info-
tainment system. The process could take up to an hour, depending on the amount of data to be trans-
ferred. If necessary, confirm the transfer on the mobile telephone. Possible functions Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. OR: if several numbers are allocated to the same contact, first touch the contact and then the desired number to make the call. Touch the Fig. 28 function button to open the search window. Enter the name you are looking for in the search window Fig. 29. The number of matching results is displayed to the right of the entry field. Touch the function button to go to the list view. Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Meaning Missed calls : shows telephone numbers of missed and unanswered calls. Dialled numbers : shows telephone numbers that were dialled on the mobile telephone and the infotainment system telephone control system. Received calls : shows all telephone numbers that were received on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system via the telephone control system. In the PHONE main menu, press the func-
tion button. Touch the ... Fig. 30 1 function button. Select the desired call list: All , Missed calls , Dialled numbers or Received calls . If a telephone number is already stored in the tele-
phone book, the stored name is displayed in the call list instead of the telephone number. Fig. 30 Call list menu Possible displays in the call menu Display Availability of call lists depends on the mobile telephone being used. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. 1) Depending on what device is used, only contacts from the telephone memory may be loaded. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 37 Speed dial buttons Assigning speed dial but-
tons Editing assigned speed di-
al buttons Fig. 31 PHONE main menu Possible functions First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. One telephone number from the telephone book can be stored to each of the speed dial buttons Fig. 31 1 . All speed dial buttons must be assigned manually and are then specific to a user profile. In the PHONE main menu, touch a free speed dial button. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. In the PHONE main menu, press and hold an assigned speed dial button until the Contacts menu opens. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. To close the Contacts menu without applying changes, touch the func-
tion button. Any telephone number stored on a speed dial button can be deleted in the User profile setup menu page 39. In the PHONE main menu, briefly touch an assigned speed dial button to dial the telephone number stored to that button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Hands-free a): the hands-free function is activated. Touch the function button during a telephone call to make the call on the mobile telephone. Select telephone : select the mobile telephone from the list view to connect it to the infotainment system. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Contacts stored to the speed dial buttons are not updated automatically. If a contact stored to a speed dial button is modified on the mobile tel-
ephone, the speed dial button must be assigned again. Telephone settings Deleting assigned speed dial buttons Dialling with speed dial buttons In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Find telephone : touch to connect a new mobile telephone. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 38 First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then Bluetooth . Bluetooth settings Function button: effect Bluetooth : touch to switch Bluetooth off. All existing connections are ended. Visibility : switch Bluetooth visibility on and off. Visible : Bluetooth visibility is activated. Not visible : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated. The Bluetooth visibility has to be switched on before a Bluetooth device can be externally paired with the infotainment system. Upon start : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated approximately 3 minutes after the engine is star-
ted. Function button: effect User profile : opens the User profile setup menu page 39. Select ring tone b): select the ring tone from the list of preset ring tones. The selected ring tone is played and stored when you leave the submenu. a) This function button is only active during a telephone call. b) Either the selected ring tone or the ring tone set in the mobile phone is sounded, depending on what mobile phone is being used. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Manage favourites : to edit speed dial buttons. Sort by : set the sorting order for telephone book entries (Last name or First name). Import contacts : touch to import the address book from the connected telephone or to update the previously imported address book. Delete other profiles : to delete individual or all non-active user profiles. Name : to display or edit the device name. This name is displayed to other Bluetooth devices in their Bluetooth settings. Paired devices : displays paired devices. Separating and connecting individual Bluetooth devices and Bluetooth profiles. Find devices : finds Bluetooth devices that are set to visible and are within the range of the infotainment system. The maximum range is approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : this function must be activated if you want to connect an external audio source to the infotainment system via Bluetoothpage 28. Assigned speed dial button: touch to delete the stored number. Unassigned speed dial button: touch to store a number from the address book to the speed dial button. User profile settings In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then User profile . First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 39 40 Introduction First read and observe the introductory information given on page 40. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
System settings main menu (Setup) . Press the SETUP infotainment button to open the System setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. System settings main menu (Setup) Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : ejects the memory card from the system. Once the memory card has been ejec-
ted from the system the function button is greyed out. Sound : make sound and volume settings page 42. Screen : make screen settings. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Time and date : set the time and date. Language : select the desired language for text and voice output. Keypad : select the required layout (alphabetical or keyboard layout). More keypad languages : select additional keypad languages. Units : sets units of measurement for displays in the vehicle. Bluetooth : make settings relating to Bluetooth page 39. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. Display off (in 10 s) : when this function is activated, the screen switches off if no button is press-
ed on the infotainment system for about ten seconds. The screen is switched back on by touch-
ing the screen or pressing an infotainment button. Brightness : select the brightness of the screen. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Show clock in standby mode : the screen shows the current time when the infotainment system is in standby mode. Time : to set the current time. Time format : select the format for the time display (12 or 24-hour). Summer (DST) : summer time is activated. Date : set the current date. Date format : to select the format for the date display (DD.MM.YY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY). Distance, Speed, Temperature, Volume, Consumption and Pressure. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 40 ment system works properly. It is important that the correct date and time are set in the vehicle to ensure the infotain-
Function button: effect Factory settings : restoring the factory settings will erase entered data and settings depending on which option has been selected. System information : displays the system information (serial number, hardware and software versions). Copyright : copyright information. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 41 42 Introduction Sound and volume settings First read and observe the introductory information given on page 42. Changes are automatically stored when a menu is closed. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Adjusting settings . Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Adjusting settings Press the SOUND infotainment button. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button and then select Sound to open the Sound setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Max. switch-on volume : define the maximum volume at switch-on. Announcements : to set the output volume for announcements (e.g. traffic announcements). Speed-dep. vol. (GALA) : define the scope of the speed-dependent volume control. The audio vol-
ume is automatically increased as the vehicle speed increases. Audio lower. : set how much the volume of the infotainment system should be reduced by when the ParkPilot is active. AUX volume : to set the output volume for audio sources that are connected via the AUX-IN mul-
timedia socket (Quiet, Medium or Loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources. BT audio : to set the output volume for audio sources connected via Bluetooth (quiet, medium or loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sour-
ces. Function button: effect Bass - Mid- Treble : sets the tonal quality (Bass - Mid - Treble). Balance or Balance - Fader : set the sound focus. The crosshair shows the where the sound is currently focused in the car's interior. To move the sound focus, touch the required position on the interior view or use the arrow buttons to change the position. To place the focus of sound at the centre of the interior view, touch the function button between the arrows. Volume : to make volume settings. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources If you need to increase the output volume of an ex-
ternal audio source, first lower the base volume on the infotainment system. If the sound from the external audio source is too quiet, increase the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Medium or Loud. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 42 If the sound from the connected external audio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Me-
dium or Quiet. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 43 AM A2DP AUX-IN AVRCP Abbreviation Definition Abbreviations DIN DRM EON FM HFP MP3 RDS TP VBR WMA Generic technology for the transmission of audio signals via Bluetooth (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile). Amplitude modulation (medium wave, MW). Auxiliary audio input. Universal technology for remote control of audio sources via Bluetooth (Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile). German Standards Authority (Deutsches Institut fr Normung). Digital rights management. Supporting of other networks (enhanced other network). Frequency modulation (very high frequency, VHF). Wireless telephony (hands-free profile). Format for compressing audio files. Radio data system. Traffic news function (traffic program). Variable bit rate. Format for compressing audio files. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 44 Bluetooth Function buttons (soft keys) External data storage device PHONE main menu . 34 USB . 26 External audio sources . 27 Adjusting playback volume . 42 BT audio . 28 F Factory settings . 40 FM . 12, 44 Frequency band Profiles . 31 Settings . 39 Bluetooth audio . 28 Browsing lists . 9 BT audio . 28 Buttons . 8 Infotainment system . 6 AM . 12 Changing . 12 FM . 12 Selecting . 12 Function buttons . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Operating . 8 Radio main menu . 12 Index A AM . 12 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 AUX-IN . 27 AUX-IN socket . 27 External audio sources . 27 Selecting . 23 AUX-IN socket . 27 B Base volume . 8 Adjusting . 8 Muting . 8 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Cannot be read . 25 Ejecting . 25 Faulty . 25 Inserting . 25 Mode . 25 Selecting . 23 Checkboxes . 8 Control elements (infotainment system) . 6 Copyright . 20 Information . 41 Cursor . 10 D Dialling a number . 36 During a telephone call . 35 E Eject Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Infotainment buttons . 6, 7 Input window . 10 Interference from a mobile telephone . 7 Introduction . 3 K Keypad . 10 M Main menu G GALA . 42 H Hard keys . 7 Hard keys (infotainment system) . 6 I Ignition off MEDIA . 22 PHONE . 34 RADIO . 12 Settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound . 42 C Call lists . 37 CD see CD . 25 EON . 17, 44 Explosion risk areas AUX-IN socket . 27 Bit rate . 20 Telephone . 31 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 MEDIA Index 45 P PHONE O On-screen keypad . 10 Operation Bluetooth audio . 28 CD audio data . 20 CD cannot be read . 25 CD faulty . 25 CD mode . 25 Changing media source . 23 Changing tracks . 24 Copyright . 20 Displays . 22 Displays and symbols . 23 Ejecting a CD . 25 External data storage device connected to Additional display information . 11 Adjusting the volume . 8 Browsing lists . 9 Checkboxes . 8 Entries . 10 Function buttons . 8 Infotainment buttons . 7 Input window . 10 Muting . 8 On-screen keypad . 10 PHONE . 30, 34 RADIO . 12 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Scrolling . 9 Slider . 9 Switching on and off . 7 Touchscreen . 8 USB port . 26 Fast forward . 24 Fast reverse . 24 Function buttons . 22 Inserting a CD . 25 Inserting memory card . 26 Main menu . 22 Media mode . 20 Media source selection menu . 23 Memory card cannot be read . 26 MP3 files . 20 Playback modes . 22 Playing order . 21 Playlists . 21 Preparing for removal . 26 Random play (Mix) . 22 Removing memory card . 26 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements . 20 Restrictions . 21 Scan function (SCAN) . 22 Selecting storage devices . 23 Selecting track . 24 Settings . 28 Track information . 23 Track list . 24 WMA files . 20 Media sources . 23 AUX-IN . 23 CD . 23 Memory card . 23 Selecting . 23 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution A2DP . 31 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 Bluetooth profiles . 31 Bluetooth settings . 39 Call lists . 37 Connecting via infotainment system . 32 Contacts . 36 Description of functions . 31 Dialling . 36 Displays and symbols . 35 During a telephone call . 35 Entering telephone number . 36 Explosion risk areas . 31 Function buttons . 34 General information . 31 HFP . 31 Main menu . 34 Mobile telephone pairing . 32 Pairing via infotainment system . 32 Settings . 38 Speed dial buttons . 38 Telephone book . 36 Telephone control . 30 Telephone control system . 34 User profile settings . 39 Cannot be read . 26 Inserting . 26 Preparing memory card for removal . 26 Removing . 26 Selecting . 23 Muting . 8 N Numbers AUX-IN . 27 CD . 25 External data storage device (USB) . 26 MEDIA . 22 Memory card . 22 RADIO . 12 Track . 24 Dialling . 36 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Memory card Playback 46 Screen Scan function (SCAN) MEDIA . 22 RADIO . 16 see Memory card . 26 Setting date . 40 Settings Operating . 8 Screen (infotainment system) . 6 Scrolling . 9 SD card AM . 18 Bluetooth . 39 Defaults . 40 Factory settings . 40 FM . 18 Main menu . 40 Media . 28 Menu and system settings . 40 PHONE . 38 Radio . 18 Sound . 42 System . 40 User profile . 39 Volumes . 42 Setting time . 40 SETUP Pop-up windows . 8 Q Quick reference guide . 3 R RADIO . 12 AM settings . 18 Display of station names . 13 Displays and symbols . 13 EON . 17 FM settings . 18 Frequency change . 12 Function buttons . 12 Main menu . 12 Radio mode . 12 Radio text . 16 RDS . 13 Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting stations . 14 Settings . 18 Setting station frequency . 14 Setting stations . 14 Station buttons . 14 Station list . 14 Station tracking via RDS . 13 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing stations . 14 TP (traffic program) . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news . 17 Radio text (RDS) . 16 Random play (Mix) . 22 RDS . 13 Automatic station tracking . 13 Radio text . 16 RDS Regional . 13 TP (traffic program) . 17 Repeat . 22 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements for CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting . 14 Setting . 14 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing . 14 Station search . 16 Station tracking . 13 Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Switching off . 7 Switching on . 7 T Telephone control Infotainment system . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Radio main menu . 12 Sound focus (balance, fader) . 42 Sound settings (treble, bass) . 42 Speed-dependent volume . 42 Speed dial buttons . 38 Station buttons . 14 Station names . 13 Stations CDs . 20 memory cards . 20 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Rotary/push knobs (infotainment system) . 6 S Safety information see Settings . 40 Slider . 9 Soft keys Media . 22 Radio . 16 Infotainment system . 3 see PHONE . 30 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 SCAN Index 47 USB Volume User profile V VHF Telephone control system (PHONE) see FM . 44 Settings . 39 see TP (traffic program) . 17 Connecting an external data storage device . 26 Disconnecting . 26 Not readable . 26 U Unit buttons . 7 Switching off . 33 Text input . 10 Things to note AUX operation . 27 Displays . 11 Volume reduction . 7 Timeout . 7 Touchscreen (infotainment system) . 6 TP (traffic program) EON . 17 Switching on and off . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Track list . 24 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news Adjusting . 8 Base volume . 8 Determining for external audio sources . 42 Speed-dependent volume increase (GALA) . 42 Traffic announcements . 42 Volume distribution (balance, fader) . 42 Volume reduction . 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 48
1 2 | User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 3.26 MiB | / October 09 2014 |
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution L40VW2 L41VW2 L42VW2 L53VW2 Composition Touch, Composition Colour:
Radio Stand: 21.08.2013 Englisch: 11.2013 Artikel-Nr.: 142.5R6.RCT.20 1425R6RCT20 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution ment. NOTICE the next page. DANGER CAUTION WARNING Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation on the protection of the environ-
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which could lead to slight or se-
vere injuries if you do not observe the warn-
ing. Texts with this symbol indicate situations which could cause damage to the vehicle or ve-
hicle equipment if you do not observe the warning. er, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concern-
ing any term. Symbols like these refer you to warnings within the same section or on a given page. They draw your attention to possi-
ble risks of accident or injury and explain how they can be avoided. Cross reference to information about pos-
sible damage to your vehicle within the same section or on a given page. Description of symbols Refers to a section within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes that should always be observed. Indicates that the section is continued on Indicates the end of a section. Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible. Indicates a registered trademark. Howev-
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations which will lead to fatal or severe in-
juries if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Volkswagen AG works continuously to develop and further improve all models. Please understand that we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifications at any time. The data provided con-
cerning scope of delivery, appearance, perform-
ance, dimensions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and vehicle functions are all correct at the time of going to print. Some of the equipment described might not yet be available in a particular vehicle (information can be provided by your local Volkswagen dealership), and some equipment may not be available in certain countries. No legal com-
mitment may be inferred from the information, illus-
trations or descriptions in this manual. No part of this manual may be reprinted, repro-
duced or translated without the written permission of Volkswagen AG. All rights under the laws of copyright are expressly reserved by Volkswagen AG. Subject to alteration and amendment. Printed in Germany. Volkswagen AG 2013 This paper was bleached without the use of chlorine. FCC Compliance Statement [Level 4]
<North America>
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turn-ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution:
Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
<Canada>
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause Interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION MODEL L40VW2 L42VW2 L41VW2 L53VW2 Dimensions (mm) W Dimensions (mm) H Dimensions (mm) D 214.1 246.0 246.0 246.0 136.5 140.6 140.6 140.6 203.2 208.3 208.3 208.3 Weight (KG) 1.96 1.54 2.10 2.10 Power Requirement 9V~18V 9V~18V 9V~18V 9V~18V Power Consumption 25W * 4CH 25W * 4CH 25W * 4CH 25W * 4CH Bluetooth Specification Standard Bluetooth Version 2.1 Frequency Range 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz Output Power (Max.)
+4 dBm Max. 3 2 3 6 7 Index . 45 Abbreviations . 44 Table of Contents About this manual . Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system . 30 Description of telephone control system . 34 Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound and volume settings . 42 Audio mode Radio mode . 12 Media mode . 20 Introduction Before using the unit for the first time . Safety information for the infotainment system . Overview of the control elements . General information on operating the unit . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Table of Contents 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 1425R6RCT20 1 of the equipment described might not be fitted in your vehicle. Your Volkswagen dealership can pro-
vide more information on this. All details provided in this manual correspond to the information available at the time of going to print and apply only to factory-fitted infotainment systems. Due to continuous technical improvement of the infotainment system and possible updates to the unit's software, the displays and functions on the infotainment system may differ from the details given in this manual. No claims may be derived from the differing details, illustrations or descrip-
tions. Please ensure that this manual is in the vehicle if you lend or sell the vehicle to someone else. About this manual An alphabetical index is included at the end of this manual. A list of abbreviations explains technical abbre-
viations and terms. Directions and positions (e.g. right, left, front, rear) are normally relative to the vehicle's direction of travel. Illustrations help with orientation and should be regarded as a general guide. In right-hand drive vehicles the controls may sometimes be different to those displayed in illus-
trations or described in the text. All equipment and models are described without indicating whether the equipment is optional or specific to the model type. This means that some CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour page 40. WARNING WARNING Introduction Safety information for the infotainment system Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Operating the infotainment sys-
tem can distract you from the road. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Setting the volume too high may damage your hearing. This also applies even if you are only exposed to high volumes for short periods. Before using the unit for the first time Before using the infotainment system for the first time, carry out the following steps. This will enable you to use the infotainment system safely and make full use of the functions it provides:
Observe safety notes page 3. Familiarise yourself with the controls for the infotainment system page 7. In the System setup, reset the infotainment system to its original condition (factory settings) Use suitable data storage devices for media mode page 20. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution External devices that are placed loose in the vehicle or not properly secured can be flung though the interior and cause injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. You should never position or attach an ex-
ternal device on a door, on the windscreen or above or near to the areas marked AIRBAG on the steering wheel, the dash panel and the seat backrests, or between these areas and the vehicle occupants. External devices can cause serious injury in an accident, especial-
ly when the airbags deploy. The volume level may suddenly change when you switch audio source or connect a new audio source. Reduce the base volume before switching audio source or connecting a new audio source. The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. Opening the housing on a CD player can lead to injuries from invisible laser radiation. CD players should only be repaired by a qualified workshop. Connecting leads for external devices may obstruct the driver. Arrange the connecting leads so that they do not obstruct the driver. The infotainment system can be damaged by incorrect insertion of a storage device or inser-
tion of an incompatible storage device. Connecting, inserting or removing a storage device while the vehicle is in motion can dis-
tract you from the road and lead to accidents. WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE (Continued) NOTICE (Continued) Only clean 12 cm standard CDs should be used. The vehicle loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound is distor-
ted. The CD drive can be damaged by any foreign objects attached to a storage device, and by ir-
regularly shaped storage devices. Do not affix stickers or other items to the data storage device. Stickers may peel off and damage the CD drive. Do not use printable data storage devi-
ces. Coatings and prints may peel off and damage the drive. Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-
larly shaped CDs or DVDs. Do not insert DVD Plus discs, dual discs or flip discs, as these are thicker than nor-
mal CDs. When inserting a memory card, ensure that it is correctly positioned page 20. Applying force may destroy the memory card slot's locking mechanism. Only use suitable memory cards. When inserting and removing a CD, always hold it flat and at a right angle to the front of the unit. Inserting or removing a CD at an angle to the drive can lead to scratching page 20. Inserting a second CD while a CD is already in the CD drive or being ejected can destroy the CD drive in the unit. Always wait until the CD is completely ejected!
CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 2 Overview of the control elements Fig. 1 Overview of the control elements Different versions of the infotainment system are supplied. The labelling and functions of the infotainment buttons Fig. 1 2 and the position of the CD slot 5 may vary between versions. 1 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Rotary/push knob:
Press to switch on or off page 7. Turn to adjust the basic volume on whichever source is in use page 7. Infotainment buttons: press a button to select a function. RADIO : switches to radio mode and changes frequency band in radio mode page 12. MEDIA : switches to media mode page 20. CAR : opens vehicle and system settings Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Introduction to the in-
SETUP : opens menu and system settings page 40. SOUND : opens sound and volume settings page 40. EJECT : ejects the CD page 20. MUTE : mute the audio source page 8. PHONE : opens the telephone control system page 30. The current audio source is muted if no CD slot: for inserting and removing CDs page 20. AUX-IN socket: for connecting an external audio source page 20. Memory card slot: the slot is located underneath or to the left of the screen, depending on the unit version page 20. Touchscreen page 7. Setting knob: the function of this button depends on the unit's operating state. In all radio modes: turn for manual station or channel selection. Press to start and stop the scan In media mode: turn to open the track list. Press to start and stop the scan function page 20. Turn to select menu options in long lists and press to access the selected option (e.g. select a sta-
Composition Touch, Composition Colour mobile telephone provision is installed. tion from the station list). function page 12. fotainment system. 5 6 7 3 4 2 11 7 7 8 8 9 10 Introduction is available from the local authorities. Due to country-specific legislation, certain functions cannot be selected on the screen Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle loudspeakers. when the vehicle is travelling above a certain speed. There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information General information on operating the unit Not all listed function buttons and functions may be available due to the device software used in your market. The equipment is not faulty if a function button is missing from the screen. In some vehicles equipped with ParkPilot, the volume of the current audio source is auto-
matically lowered when reverse gear is engaged. Volume reduction can be set in the Sound setup menupage 42. Changes to settings may cause the display content to vary and some aspects of the infotainment sys-
tem operation to differ from the descriptions given in this manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons . Switching on and off . Adjusting base volume . Operating function buttons and displays on the screen . Selecting list entries and browsing lists . Input windows with on-screen keypad . Additional display information and display options . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Infotainment buttons This manual uses a button symbol with blue con-
tent and the term infotainment button to refer to buttons on the infotainment system, e.g. the info-
tainment button MEDIA . Infotainment buttons are operated either by press-
ing them or by pressing and holding. Rotary/push knobs and infotainment buttons information on page 7. After switching on, the system starts at the last se-
lected volume setting, provided that this does not exceed the preselected maximum switch-on vol-
ume page 42, Sound and volume settings. Depending on the unit version and the country, the infotainment system may switch off automatically when the engine is switched off or the vehicle key Rotary/push knobs The left-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 is re-
ferred to as the volume control or the on/off switch. The right-hand rotary/push knob Fig. 1 4 is re-
ferred to as the setting knob. Switching on and off information on page 7. To switch the infotainment system on or off man-
ually, briefly press the rotary/push knob Fig. 1 1 . Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly touch-
ing the touchscreen is sufficient to operate First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory the infotainment system. Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 7 other vehicle. switching the infotainment system back on. on page 3 and the introductory information The infotainment system is permanently linked to the vehicle. It cannot be used in an-
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected, the ignition must be switched on before First read and observe the safety warnings on page 7. Adjusting base volume Any media source currently being played is stop-
ped while the infotainment system is muted. ap-
pears on the display. is removed from the ignition lock. If the infotain-
ment system is switched on again, it will switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes
(switch-off delay). Function: action Increasing the volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 clockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel Booklet Owner's manual. Decreasing volume: turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anticlockwise or press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Changes to the base volume are indicated by a bar on the screen. During this time the infotain-
ment system cannot be operated. It is possible to preset certain volume settings and adjustments page 42. Muting the infotainment system Turn the volume control Fig. 1 1 anti-
clockwise until is displayed. OR: press the MUTE infotainment system but-
ton1) Fig. 1 2 . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The infotainment system is equipped with a touchscreen Fig. 1 3 . Active areas of the screen where certain functions can be accessed are called function buttons. These buttons are operated by briefly touching the screen or by touching and holding. Function but-
tons are referred to in this manual with the word function button and a button symbol ... Function buttons start functions or open subme-
nus. In submenus the name of the currently selec-
ted menu is displayed in the title bar Fig. 2 A . Operating function buttons and displays on the screen duce the volume again before switching to another audio source. Fig. 2 Overview of possible function buttons on the screen If the base volume has been considerably in-
creased to play a certain audio source, re-
First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory information on page 7. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 1) Depending on the unit version. 8 B A C OK
...
+ / -
... / ... Selecting list entries and browsing lists Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be selected. Overview of displays and function buttons Displays and function buttons: action and effect In the title bar, the currently selected menu and any other possible function buttons are displayed. Touch to open a further menu. Move the crosshair across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. OR: touch the desired position on the screen, the crosshair moves to this position. Touch to move up one level at a time from certain lists. Touch to move up one level at a time to the main menu from a submenu or to undo in-
puts made. Touch to open a pop-up window (option window), displaying further setting options. Some functions or displays are marked with a checkbox and are activated or deacti-
vated by touching this box. Touch to confirm an input or selection. Touch to close a pop-up window or an input window. Touch to change settings incrementally. Move the slider across the screen with slight pressure without losing contact. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Browsing lists (scrolling) If there are more items available in a list view than can be displayed on the screen, function buttons for scrolling or a scroll bar are displayed on the right of the screen Fig. 3. Browsing lists line-by-line: touch the or function button briefly. Browsing lists page-by-page: briefly touch the screen above or below the scroll marker. Browsing long lists quickly page-by-page: touch and hold the screen above or below the scroll marker. To quickly scan through a long list, place your finger on the scroll marker and move it over the screen without losing contact. Lift your finger off the screen when you reach the desired position. List entries can be opened by touching them di-
rectly on the screen or by using the setting knob Fig. 1 4 . Marking and selecting list entries with the setting knob Turn the setting knob to mark each consecutive list entry with a selection box so you can browse through the list. Press the setting knob to select the marked list entry. Fig. 3 List entries settings menu information on page 7. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 9 Input windows with on-screen keypad First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 4 Input window with on-screen keyboard information on page 7. Input windows with on-screen keyboard allow you to enter text, such as an entry name for storing a destination or a search term for searching in long lists. Not all of the function buttons listed here are avail-
able in all countries and for all topics. Subsequent chapters only explain those functions that differ from the general view described here. Overview of function buttons Function buttons: action and effect The input line with the cursor is located on the left in the top line of the screen *. All inputs are dis-
played here. Input windows for free text input An input window for free text entry allows any let-
ter, number and special character to be entered in any combination. Touching the OK function button applies the se-
quence of characters currently displayed in the window. Input windows for selecting a stored entry It is only possible to select a sequence of letters, numbers and special characters that matches a stored entry. Every time a character is entered, a destination corresponding to the specifications is proposed in the input line. When terms are made up of more than one word, the space must be entered as well. If fewer than 99 entries are available, the number of remaining entries is displayed after the input line Fig. 4 2 . Touching this function button displays a list of these remaining entries. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Press and hold to open a pop-up window with special characters based on the letter shown. Touch the desired character to enter it. Some special characters can also be written out
(e.g. AE for ). Touch to switch between upper and lower case. Touch to enter a space. Touch to accept the suggestion in the input line and close the input window. Touch to delete characters in the input line from right to left. Press and hold to delete several characters at once. Touch to close the input window. 123... : touch to open the input window for numbers and special characters. ABC... : touch to go back to the input window for letters. Displays the number and opens the list of entries corresponding to the specifications that are still available. Letters/numbers Touch to insert the character in the input line. Composition Touch, Composition Colour Letters and OK 10 1 2 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory The displays that appear on the screen can vary depending on the settings, and may differ from those described here. Displays such as the current time and the current outside temperature can be displayed on the screen in the status bar. All displays appear only after the infotainment sys-
tem has completed start-up. Additional display information and display options information on page 7. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Introduction 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 11 with a window aerial. 12 13 14 14 16 16 17 17 18 Introduction RADIO main menu Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehicles Multi-storey car parks, tunnels, high buildings and mountains can impair radio reception. Audio mode Radio mode Basic information on use page 7 Menu and system settings (SETUP) page 40 Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
RADIO main menu . RDS radio data service . Station buttons . Selecting, setting and storing stations . Scan function (SCAN) . Radio text . TP function (traffic program) . Incoming traffic announcement . FM/AM settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Changes the displayed station button group by touching the function button. Opens the list of currently receivable radio stations page 14. Opens the frequency dial for the selected frequency band page 15. Opens the settings menu for the currently activated frequency band (FM or AM) page 18. Function buttons in the RADIO main menu Function button: effect 1 Selecting the frequency band Select the required frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Fig. 5 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 6 Radio mode station list 12
< / >
Function button: effect a) Varies by country and unit version. SCAN 1... to 12... RDS radio data service A RDS offa) TP No TP Possible displays and symbols Display: meaning Browses through the available or stored stations. Setting for the arrow buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on page 16. Station buttons for storing stations page 14. Updates the station list (AM frequency band) page 15. Displays station frequency or station name, and also possibly radio text. Station name and radio text are only displayed when RDS is available and activated page 13. The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 18. TP traffic news is activated and can be received page 17. No traffic news station can be received. The radio station is stored to a station button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Station name and automatic station tracking If RDS is available, station names can be dis-
played in the RADIO main menu and in the FM station list. FM radio stations may occasionally or continuously broadcast different content on different regional frequencies under the same station name (e.g. Ra-
dio 2). By default, automatic station tracking always switches to the currently selected station's frequen-
cy that offers the best reception, as the vehicle travels from one area to the next. As a result, you may lose the regional programme you are listening to. Automatic frequency changing and automatic sta-
tion tracking can be deactivated in the FM setup page 18. RDS (radio data system) is a radio data service which enables additional FM services, such as the display of station names, automatic station track-
ing, radio text and TP traffic news (TP). RDS is not supported by all units and is not availa-
ble everywhere or on every FM radio station. RDS can be deactivated in some country and unit versions page 18. Without RDS it is not possible to use radio data services. Fig. 7 RADIO main menu information on page 12. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 8 Radio mode station list Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 13 Fig. 9 RADIO main menu Changing station button group Station buttons Selecting stations via the station buttons information on page 12. The radio stations are responsible for the content of the information sent. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory In the RADIO main menu, you can store stations from the currently selected frequency band on 12 consecutively numbered function buttons. These function buttons are called station buttons. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch the station button that shows the required station. When a stored station is selected via the station buttons, it will only be played if it can be received at your current location. Touch the Fig. 9 1 function button. The station buttons are displayed in groups of four function buttons
( 1 ... to 4 ... , 5 ... to 8 ... and 9 ... to 12 ... ). If radio text is shown instead of the station buttons, touch radio text in order to show the station buttons. See Storing stations page 15. Selecting, setting and storing stations Storing stations to station but-
tons Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 11 Radio mode station list Fig. 10 RADIO main menu Displaying station buttons 14 Updating the station list Displaying the frequency dial on page 3 and the introductory information Adjusting the frequency in stages Tuning to a station frequency manually Selecting stations from a station list Selecting stations Selecting stations using arrow buttons
< / >
First read and observe the safety warnings on page 12. Touch the < or > Fig. 10 function button. The unit only switches to stored or receivable stations, depending on what settings have been made for the arrow buttons. Setting for the ar-
row buttons in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Search through the list and touch the required station to select it. To close the station list, touch the Fig. 11 function button. In the FM frequency band the station list is updated automatically. In the AM frequency band, touch the Fig. 11 function button to up-
date the station list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Turn the setting knob one stop further. OR: touch the Fig. 10 function button. Turn the setting knob. OR: touch the arrow buttons to the left or the right of the frequency band. Touch one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. The next receivable station is set automatically. OR: press and hold one of the arrow buttons at the top of the screen Fig. 10. When you release the button, the unit automatically tunes to the next available station. OR: place your finger on the slider in the frequency dial and drag it along the dial. Briefly press the setting knob. Manual frequency selection is also closed if you select a station with a station button. The frequency band closes automatically after a period of inactivity. Press and hold the desired station button Fig. 10 until a tone is soun-
ded. The station currently playing is then stored on that station button. Touch the Fig. 10 function button to open the station list. Stations already stored on a station button are marked in the station list with the Fig. 11 symbol. Select the desired station by pressing and holding on the screen. Touch the button to which you wish this station to be assigned. A signal tone sounds, and the station is then stored on this station but-
ton. Repeat the process to store further stations from the station list. All stored stations can be deleted individually or together in the FM/AM setup menu page 18. Storing a station from the station list to a station button Storing the current station to a station button Quickly browsing through the frequency band Hiding the frequency band Deleting stored stations Storing stations Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 15 Starting the scan function Stopping the scan function First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Scan function (SCAN) information on page 12. When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current frequency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each. SCAN appears on the display. Fixed station names are indicated by a dot to each side of the name. The fixed text is adopted for all the station buttons on which the corresponding station is stored. Stopping station names scrolling (FM frequency) Some radio stations transmit a very long station name, which is shown on the screen as a scrolling text. To fix the text that is currently displayed to the screen, touch the station name and hold until a tone is sounded. Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the function button and then select SCAN . Press the setting knob briefly. OR: touch the SCAN function button to end the scan function at the station arrived at. Manually selecting a station with the station buttons also stops the scan function. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch displayed radio text Fig. 12. Touch displayed radio text Fig. 13. In the FM setup menu, deactivate the Radio text function button by touch-
ing it page 18. Fig. 12 RADIO main menu information on page 12. Hiding station buttons Displaying station buttons Switching off radio text per-
manently The station buttons can be hidden to enlarge the display area for the radio text Fig. 13. Some RDS-compatible stations also broadcast ad-
ditional text information known as radio text. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 13 Radio mode: radio text is visible Composition Touch, Composition Colour Radio text 16 Fig. 15 Radio mode: station list with TP display TP function (traffic program) First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Fig. 14 RADIO main menu with TP display information on page 12. In FM mode, the selected station must support the TP function. After the TP function is switched on, if you change via the station buttons or manual se-
lection to a station that does not support the TP function, traffic news monitoring will not be possi-
ble (display: No TP). If the currently selected traffic news station can no longer be received, No TP is also displayed and you will have to start a manual station search page 14. In AM mode or media mode, the unit will always automatically tune to a traffic news station in the background, provided that a TP station is availa-
ble. This procedure may take some time. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic news monitoring with the TP function is only possible if a traffic news station is available. Traffic news stations are indicated in the RADIO main menu and in the station list by TP Fig. 14 and Fig. 15. Some stations that do not broadcast their own traf-
fic news support the TP function through a link to a traffic news station (EON). Switching the TP function on and off In the FM/AM setup menu, activate or deac-
tivate the Traffic program (TP) function button by touching it page 18. If the station that is currently selected does not support the TP function, No TP will be shown in the top right of the screen. Activated TP function and station selection While traffic news monitoring is on, TP is displayed at the top right in audio mode Fig. 14. Traffic an-
nouncements broadcast by the current station or a linked traffic news station will interrupt the current audio mode. During the traffic announcement a pop-up window is displayed and, if required, the radio is switched to the traffic news station (EON) for the duration of the traffic announcement. The media mode is paused and the volume is ad-
justed to the preset level page 42. Incoming traffic announcement information on page 12. Incoming traffic announcements will interrupt the active audio mode. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 17 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory FM/AM settings information on page 12. The traffic announcement volume setting can be adjusted with the volume control Fig. 1 1 . The adjusted volume setting will be applied to sub-
sequent announcements. FM setup Select the FM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the FM setup menu. Touch the Cancel function button to end the traffic announcement. The TP function remains ac-
tivated. OR: touch the Deactivate function button to end the current traffic announcement and permanently switch off the TP function. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 17. Radio text : radio text is activated page 16. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Radio Data System (RDS) a): the radio data system (RDS) is deactivated page 13. If the checkbox is deactivated, the traffic program (TP) and radio text functions are not available. Alternative frequency (AF) : automatic station tracking is activated. If the checkbox is deactiva-
ted, automatic station tracking is switched off. The RDS Regional function button is then inac-
tive (greyed out). Fixed : the unit only switches to alternative frequencies for the selected station that broadcast the same regional service. Automatic : the unit always switches to the station's frequency that currently offers the best reception. As a result, regional programmes may be interrupted. a) Varies by country and unit version. AM setup Select the AM frequency band by pressing the RADIO infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the AM setup menu. All : all stored stations will be deleted (FM 1, FM 2, FM 3). To delete individual stations, selected the desired preset list FM 1 , FM 2 or FM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. RDS Regional : defines the setting for automatic station tracking with RDS page 13. Advanced setup : settings for the RDS radio data services. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 18 All : all stored stations will be deleted (AM 1, AM 2, AM 3). To delete individual stations, select the desired preset list AM 1 , AM 2 or AM 3 . Then touch the station button of the station you wish to delete. Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Delete preset list : to delete some or all stored stations. Preset list : all stored stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Stations : all available stations on the selected frequency band can be browsed with the arrow buttons. Function button: effect Scan : scan function (SCAN). When the scan function is running, all available stations on the current fre-
quency band are played in sequence for approximately 5 seconds each page 16. Arrow buttons : define the settings for the < und > arrow buttons. The setting is adopted for all frequency bands (FM, AM). CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 19 27 26 28 28 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 Introduction Media mode This product is subject to certain intellectual property rights and copyrights owned by the Media sources are audio sources containing au-
dio files on various different storage devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external MP3 player). These au-
Microsoft Corporation. The use or distribution of this type of technology outside this product re-
quires a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft company. dio files can be played by the infotainment system from its corresponding drives or audio input sock-
ets (internal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN socket etc.). Copyright Audio and video files stored on data storage devi-
ces are normally subject to national and interna-
tional copyright laws. Observe legal requirements. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Data storage device and file requirements . Playing order of files and folders . MEDIA main menu . Changing the media source . Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu . Selecting tracks from the track list . Inserting or ejecting a CD . Inserting or removing a memory card . External data storage device connected to USB port . External audio source connected to the AUX-
IN socket . Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth . Media settings . CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Requirements for playing in the unit CD Digital Audio specification . MP3 files (.mp3) with bit rates of between 32 and 320 kbit/s or with variable bit rate. WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono/stereo without copy protec-
tion. Playlists in the formats PLS, M3U and WPL. Playlists no larger than 20 kB and containing no more than 1,000 entries. File name and path information not longer than 256 charac-
ters. Media source Audio CDs (up to 80 minutes). CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW audio data CDs up to max. 700 MB (mega-
bytes) with the file systems ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 SD and MMC memory cards with the file systems FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, VFAT or exFAT up to max. 2 GB (gigabytes), SDHC memory cards up to max. 32 GB and SDXC memory cards up to max. 2 TB (terabytes). Data storage device and file requirements information on page 20. Factory-fitted CD drives conform to safety class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/ VDE 0837. The infotainment system only accepts standard 12 cm CDs, and memory cards measuring 32 mm x 24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm. The supported file formats listed are collectively re-
ferred to below as audio files. A CD containing audio files of these types is referred to as an au-
dio data CD. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 20 Do not use memory card adapters. Audio file playback via Bluetootha). Media source AUX External audio source. Playing order of files and folders No liability can be accepted for damaged or lost files on the storage devices. Requirements for playing in the unit Playback of external audio sources via 3.5 mm jack plug page 27. The external media player must support the A2DP Blue-
tooth profile page 28. The reading time may vary considerably depend-
ing on the condition of the storage device (copying and deleting actions), folder structure and file type. Playlists only determine a certain playing order. There are no files stored in a playlist. The unit will not play a playlist if the files are not stored on the storage device at the locations referred to by the playlist (relative file paths). a) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Restrictions and notes Contamination, exposure to high temperatures and mechanical damage can render storage devices unusable. Please observe the manufacturer's in-
structions. Variations in the quality of storage devices from dif-
ferent manufacturers can lead to problems during playback. Please observe copyright laws. The unit may be unable to read individual tracks or the entire storage device due to the storage devi-
ce's configuration or the devices and programs used for recording. Information about the best ways to create audio files and configure storage devices (compression rate, ID3 tag etc.) can be found online. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio files on storage devices are often sorted by folders and playlists to determine a certain playing order. Tracks, folders and playlists on a storage device are each sorted by name in alphanumeric order. The illustration shows a typical audio data CD that contains tracks , folders and subfolders Fig. 16. The tracks are played in the following order1):
1. 2. Tracks 1 and 2 in the CD's root directory Tracks 3 and 4 in the first folder F1 in the CD's root directory Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of the folder F1 Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of the subfolder F1.1 Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of the folder F1 Tracks 8 and 9 in the second folder F2 The playing order can be altered by selecting different playback modes page 22. Fig. 16 Possible structure on an audio data CD information on page 20. 1) The Mix/Repeat including subfolders function must be activated page 40 in the Media setup menu. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 21 3. 4. 5. 6. MEDIA main menu the track selection menu page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Playlists are not played automatically. In-
stead they must be specifically selected via Function buttons in the MEDIA main menu Function button: effect Fig. 17 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. In the MEDIA main menu, various media sources can be selected and played. Press the MEDIA infotainment button to open the MEDIA main menu Fig. 17. Playback of the media source that was most re-
cently played resumes from the point where it stop-
ped. The media source currently playing is indicated at the bottom left in the function button 1 . The MEDIA main menu will indicate if no media source is available. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to select a different media source page 23. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : Bluetooth audio page 28. Opens the track list page 24. Changes track when in media mode page 24 Playback stops. The function button changes to page 24. Playback is resumed. The function button changes to page 24. Opens the Media setup menu page 28. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Composition Touch, Composition Colour
< / >
22 1 A SCAN Function button: effect Changing the media source Displays and symbols in the MEDIA main menu Display: meaning B RDS offa) TP No TP a) Varies by market and unit version. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. The function button is only displayed while the scan function is on. To start the scan func-
tion, press setting knob Fig. 1 4 or open the track list and touch the SCAN function button. Display of track information (CD text , ID3 tag with MP3 files). Audio CDs: track and track number corresponding to the track order on the CD are dis-
played. Audio files: artist name, album name and track name are displayed. Track playing time and remaining playing time in minutes and seconds. The remaining playing time displayed may differ for audio files with variable bit rate (VBR). The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS can be activated in the FM setup menu page 12. TP is activated and can be received page 12. No traffic news station can be received. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In the MEDIA main menu, press the MEDIA in-
fotainment button as often as required to switch between the available media sources. OR: in the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 18 1 function button and select the desired media source. Media sources not currently available are shown as inactive (grey) in the pop-up window. If a media source that has already been played is selected again, playback is resumed from the point that was last reached. Audio or audio data CD in the internal CD drive page 25. Memory card page 26. External data storage device connected to USB page 26. External audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. Bluetooth audio page 28. Optionally selectable media sources Function button: media source CD SD card USB AUX BT audio Fig. 18 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. The media source can also be changed in the Track list view page 24. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 23 Briefly touch the function button > once. Briefly touch the function button < twice. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory You can browse through the tracks of the media source that is currently playing using the arrow but-
tons. You cannot switch to playback from a playlist us-
ing the arrow keys. Playback from a playlist must be started manually via the track selection menu page 24, Selecting tracks from the track list. Changing tracks in the MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Fig. 19 MEDIA main menu Controlling playback via the MEDIA main menu Effect Action Goes to the start of the current track. If the track is short-
Briefly touch the function button < once. er than 3 seconds, the system goes to the start of the previous track. Goes to the start of the previous track. Changes from the first track to the last track on the storage device that is being played. Goes to the next track. Changes from the last track to the first track on the storage device that is being played. Fast reverse. Fast forward. Playback stops. The function button changes to . Playback is resumed. The function button changes to
. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Opening the track list In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button Fig. 19 to open the track list. The track that is currently playing is highlighted Fig. 20. Search through the track list and touch the de-
sired track. If track information is available, the track name is displayed instead of Track + No.. Press and hold the < function button. Press and hold the > function button. Briefly touch the function button once. Briefly touch the function button once. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory information on page 20. Selecting tracks from the track list Fig. 20 Track list from a media source Composition Touch, Composition Colour 24 A SCAN Overview of function buttons in the track list Function button: effect Opens the Sources menu. Touch to select a different media source. Indicates the media source currently selected. Touch to change the media source. CD : internal CD drive page 25. SD card : memory card page 26. USB : external data storage device connected to USB port page 26. AUX : external audio source connected to AUX-IN socket page 27. BT audio : external media player connected via Bluetooth page 28. Touch the function button to open the parent folder of the current folder on the media source. The name of the current folder will be displayed to the right of the symbol. Starts playback at the first track. Repeats all tracks. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. Repeat current track. Random play. All tracks on the same memory level as the current track are included. If Mix/repeat including subfolders is activated in Media setup subfolders are also inclu-
dedpage 28. When the scan function is running, all tracks in the current track list are played for approx-
imately 10 seconds each. Closes track list. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The internal CD drive can play audio CDs and au-
dio data CDs. When an audio CD without CD text is playing, only TITLE and the track number, corresponding to the playing order on the data medium, are displayed in the centre line of the screen. If the audio file CDs played contain additional track information (CD text , ID3 tag for MP3 files), it can be displayed on the screen. Inserting a CD Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. Push the CD into the CD slot only to the point where it is drawn in automatically. When the CD is inserted, playback will start au-
tomatically. Ejecting a CD In some countries, the vehicle key must be in the ignition lock of a cabriolet vehicle in order to eject a CD (anti-theft protection). Press the EJECT infotainment button. The CD in the drive will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 10 seconds. For safety reasons, the CD will be drawn back into the player if it is not removed within roughly 10 seconds, but the unit will not switch to CD mode. CD cannot be read or is faulty A message will be shown on the screen if the data on an inserted CD cannot be read or the CD is faulty. Inserting or ejecting a CD information on page 20. Tracks, folders and playlists can also be marked by turning the setting knob then loa-
Uneven road surfaces and strong vibrations can cause playback to jump. First read and observe the safety warn-
on page 3 and the introductory ings ded or opened up or opened by pressing the knob. Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 25 Vertical card slot Horizontal card slot back of CDs is disabled. ery time, contact a qualified workshop. Inserting a memory card Fig. 1 7 When the temperature inside the infotain-
ment system is too high, loading and play-
First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. If you insert a number of different CDs and receive the message Error: CD drive ev-
Inserting or removing a memory card information on page 20. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the lettering facing left (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. Insert a compatible memory card into the memory card slot with the cut-off corner first and the label facing up (contact surfaces facing down) until the card clicks into place. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution If a memory card cannot be inserted, ensure that it is positioned correctly and is compatible with the unit. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the memory card. Removing a memory card The inserted memory card must be prepared for removal. In the MEDIA main menu touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove the SD card safely function but-
ton. OR: touch the Remove safely function button and then select SD card . Removing The connected storage device must be prepared before removal. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button. Touch the Remove safely function button and then select USB . Data media cannot be read The message No playable files available appears if the data on the connected storage de-
vice cannot be read. Once the memory card has been ejected from the system, a message is shown on the screen and the function button is greyed out. The memory card can then be removed. Press the inserted memory card. The memory card springs out of the slot. Remove the memory card. Memory card cannot be read If you insert a memory card containing data that cannot be read, the unit will not change to memory card mode after loading. A corresponding message is displayed. In some countries and with some equipment lev-
els, the vehicle may be fitted with a USB connec-
tion in the stowage compartment in the centre console. Booklet Owner's Manual, chapter Prac-
tical equipment. Only supported audio files are displayed and played. Other files are ignored. Playback starts automatically if supported audio files are stored on the data storage device. External data storage device connected to USB port information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Composition Touch, Composition Colour 26 Fig. 21 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external storage device. Fig. 22 External audio source connected to AUX-
IN External audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution The AUX-IN socket Fig. 1 6 can only be used with a 3.5 mm jack plug. The connected external audio source is played over the vehicle speakers and cannot be control-
led via the infotainment system. AUX shows on the screen when an external audio source is connected Fig. 22. Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN socket Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Connect the external audio source to the AUX-
IN socket. Information on operating an external audio source connected to the AUX-IN socket Action Selecting another audio source on the infotainment system. Stopping playback on the external audio source. Disconnecting the plug from the AUX-IN socket. Effect The external audio source continues to run in the background. The infotainment system remains in the AUX menu. The infotainment system switches to playback of the most recently played audio source. Start playback on the external audio source. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the Fig. 21 1 function button and select AUX . The output volume of the external audio source should be adjusted to the volume of the other au-
dio sources page 42. Please read and observe the manufacturer's manual for the external audio source. Interference may occur if the external audio source is powered from the vehicles 12-volt Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 socket. 27 First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Connecting an external audio source via Bluetooth Fig. 23 MEDIA main menu information on page 20. Touch the Find devices function button to con-
nect an external Bluetooth audio source for the first time. OR: touch the Paired devices function button to select an external Bluetooth audio source from the list. Continue the process by following the prompts on the infotainment system screen and in the dis-
play on the Bluetooth audio source. You may then have to start playback on the Blue-
tooth audio source manually. When playback on the Bluetooth audio source is stopped, the infotainment system remains in Blue-
tooth audio mode. Controlling playback The extent to which the Bluetooth audio source can be controlled via the infotainment system var-
ies depending on what Bluetooth audio source is connected. With media players that support the AVRCP Blue-
tooth profile, playback on the Bluetooth audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched to Bluetooth audio mode or to a different audio source. In addition, track display or track change is possible via the in-
fotainment system. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution In Bluetooth audio mode, audio files from a Blue-
tooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone) that is connected via Bluetooth can be played over the vehicle loudspeakers (Bluetooth audio playback). Conditions The Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth profile. The Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be activated in the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Starting Bluetooth audio transfer Switch on Bluetooth visibility on the external Bluetooth audio source (e.g. mobile telephone). Reduce the base volume on the infotainment system. Press the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the Fig. 23 1 function button and se-
lect BT audio . Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : memory card is ejected from the system and can then be safely removed page 26. Sound : sound settings page 42. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing the MEDIA infotainment button. Touch the function button to open the Media setup menu. Due to the large number of possible Blue-
tooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all described functions. Media settings information on page 20. source, e.g. key tones on a mobile telephone, to prevent interference noise and malfunctions. First read and observe the safety warn-
ings on page 3 and the introductory Always switch off the warning and service tones on a connected Bluetooth audio Composition Touch, Composition Colour 28 Function button: effect Traffic program (TP) : the TP function (traffic news monitoring) is activated page 12. Mix/Repeat including subfolders : subfolders will be included in the selected playback mode page 22. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Audio mode 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 29 32 33 31 31 31 WARNING WARNING (Continued) Introduction area where the network is very weak or, in some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-
pass. This also means that no emergency calls can be made. Telephone control (PHONE) Introduction to telephone control system If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-
correctly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This can cause injuries. While the vehicle is in motion, always se-
cure the mobile telephone properly outside the airbag deployment area. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
General information . Areas where special regulations apply . Bluetooth . Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system . Switching telephone control system off . The telephone functions described in the following section can be controlled via the infotainment sys-
tem if a mobile telephone that is switched on is paired and connected with the infotainment sys-
tem. The mobile telephone must support the Blue-
tooth function otherwise a connection cannot be made between the telephone and the infotainment system. If a mobile telephone is not connected to the info-
tainment system, the telephone control system cannot be used. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Carrying a mobile telephone that is switched on just next to a pacemaker may cause the pacemaker to malfunction. Maintain a gap of approximately 20 centi-
metres between the aerials of the mobile tele-
phone and the pacemaker, as mobile tele-
phones may affect the functioning of pace-
makers. Do not carry a mobile telephone in your breast pocket above your pacemaker when the telephone is switched on or in standby mode. If you suspect interference, switch off the mobile telephone immediately. Making telephone calls and operating the tel-
ephone control system while the vehicle is in motion can distract you from the road and lead to accidents. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Select volume settings that allow signals from outside the vehicle (such as emergency services sirens) to be easily heard at all times. Your call may be cut off or you may be un-
able to make calls if you are in an area with no mobile telephone network coverage, an The centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements if raised, which could cause accidents and severe injuries. Always keep the armrest down while the vehicle is in motion. High speeds, poor weather and poor road con-
ditions as well as the network quality may im-
pair telephone calls in the vehicle. Composition Touch, Composition Colour WARNING WARNING WARNING NOTICE 30 is available from the local authorities. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on First read and observe the introductory on information and safety warnings There may be restrictions on the use of Blue-
tooth devices in some countries. Information When connecting the telephone control sys-
tem with a device using Bluetooth, read the device's operating manual for detailed safety infor-
mation. Use compatible Bluetooth products only. General information page 30. Areas where special regulations apply page 30. You may experience poor reception or may be cut off in areas where the signal is weak. Most electronic devices are shielded against high-
frequency signals. In rare cases, however, elec-
tronic devices may not be shielded against high-
frequency signals emitted by the telephone control system. This can cause interference. How the individual telephone menus are displayed depends on the mobile telephone being used. There may be differences. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual, chapter Vehicle care and maintenance. Use compatible Bluetooth devices only. Informa-
tion on compatible Bluetooth products is available from your Volkswagen dealership or online. Follow the operating manual for your mobile tele-
phone and the instructions provided by the acces-
sory manufacturer. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the mobile telephone and mobile tele-
phone provision in areas with a risk of explosion. These areas are often clearly marked, but not al-
ways clude, for example:
Areas immediately around chemical pipelines and tanks. Lower decks of ships and ferries. The area around vehicles which run on liquid gas (such as propane or butane). Places where there are chemicals or particles such as flour, dust and metal powder in the air. All other places where the vehicle engine must be switched off. Your mobile telephone must always be switch-
ed off in areas where special regulations apply and when the use of mobile telephones is for-
bidden. The radiation produced by the mobile telephone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is used to connect a mobile telephone to the telephone control system fitted in a vehicle. A pairing process has to be carried out before the telephone control system can be used with a Bluetooth mobile telephone. Switch off the mobile telephone in areas with a risk of explosion!
First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Bluetooth page 30. in Introduction on page 30. They in-
Telephone control (PHONE) WARNING NOTICE 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 31 Music playback Bluetooth Advanced Audio Dis-
tribution Profile (A2DP):
Bluetooth profile for the transmission of ster-
eo-quality audio signals. Playback controls Bluetooth Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile (AVRCP):
Bluetooth profile for displaying track informa-
tion and control of playback in the mobile device. Some Bluetooth mobile telephones are detected and connected automatically when the ignition is switched on, if a connection already exists. For this to happen, the mobile telephone itself and the Bluetooth function in the telephone must be switched on and all active Bluetooth connections to other units must be disconnected. The Bluetooth connection is free of charge. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG, Inc. Bluetooth profiles When a mobile telephone is connected to the tele-
phone control system, data is exchanged via one of the Bluetooth profiles. Basic telephony Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile
(HFP):
If a mobile telephone is connected via HFP to the telephone control system, you can make calls wirelessly via the hands-free system. The vehicle's exterior aerial cannot be used with this. Observe the notes on using a mobile telephone in the vehi-
cle without a connection to the external aerial Booklet Owner's manual. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Entries have to be made on the mobile telephone keypad during the pairing process. The mobile tel-
ephone has to be at hand for this. Starting mobile telephone pairing Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Find telephone function button. OR:
Press the PHONE infotainment button. Touch the Setup function button. Touch the Select telephone function button and then Find telephone . Once the search process is complete, the names of all Bluetooth devices found will be displayed on the screen. Select the mobile telephone to be paired from this list of Bluetooth devices and then select Hands-free telephone (HFP). The infotainment system and the mobile telephone are now connected. Further input may be required on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system to conclude the connection process. In order to operate a mobile telephone via the info-
tainment system, a single pairing process is re-
quired for both devices. Pairing should only be performed when the vehicle is stationary. Conditions Ignition is switched on. If necessary, disconnect any headsets from the mobile telephone. The Bluetooth function must be activated or set to visible on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system. The keypad lock on the mobile telephone has to be unlocked. Follow the operating manual for the mobile tele-
phone. The Bluetooth function is set to visible on the infotainment system for about 3 minutes after the ignition is switched on. Pairing and connecting mobile telephone on the infotainment system page 30. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on Composition Touch, Composition Colour 32 ternet at www.volkswagen.com. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on You will find further information on pairing and connecting mobile telephones on the In-
Switching telephone control system off page 30. Pairing and connecting mobile telephones Several mobile telephones can be paired with the infotainment system, but only one mobile tele-
phone can be connected to the infotainment sys-
tem at a time. When you switch the infotainment system on, a connection is automatically set up with the mobile telephone that was connected last. If no connec-
tion can be set up with this mobile telephone, the telephone control system automatically attempts to set up a connection with the next mobile telephone in the list of paired devices. Bluetooth connections have a maximum range of 10 metres. Any active Bluetooth connection is in-
terrupted when this distance is exceeded. The con-
nection is automatically restored as soon as the device enters the Bluetooth range. If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mobile telephone. Depends on the mobile telephone:
Enter the PIN code that is then displayed on the infotainment system into the mobile telephone and confirm it. OR:
Compare the PIN code displayed on the info-
tainment system with the PIN code displayed on the mobile telephone. If the PIN code matches, it has to be confirmed on both devices. The PHONE main menu is displayed and the tele-
phone book and the call lists stored in the mobile telephone are loaded automatically once pairing has been completed. The time taken by the load-
ing process varies depending on the amount of da-
ta stored in the mobile telephone. This data is available on the infotainment system once the loading process is completed. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Switch off the ignition. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. The telephone control system is switched off and any active call is transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The telephone control system is not switched off if the vehicle key is left in the ignition lock after the engine is switched off. Once a set time has ex-
pired, a message appears on the infotainment sys-
tem screen informing you that the telephone con-
trol system will be switched off automatically. An active call will be transferred to the mobile tele-
phone. The transfer of an active call from the tele-
phone control system to the mobile telephone can take up to approximately 10 seconds (depend-
ing on the mobile telephone being used). Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 33 34 35 36 36 37 38 38 39 39 Introduction PHONE main menu Some networks might not support all lan-
guage-dependent characters and services. Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle may cause noise from the vehicle speakers. Description of telephone control system Some functions and settings are only available when the vehicle is stationary, and are not suppor-
ted by all mobile telephones. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
PHONE main menu . During a telephone call . Entering a telephone number . Telephone book menu (Contacts) . Call lists menu . Speed dial buttons . Telephone settings . Bluetooth settings . User profile settings . Up to 20 devices can be linked to the telephone control system. One device at a time can be con-
nected via the hands-free profile (HFP) or audio playback profile (A2DP) page 33. Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Introduction to and safety information for tel-
ephone control system page 30 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Fig. 25 Incoming call data via the User profile setup menu page 39. The telephone book will be automati-
cally updated when the telephone is connected again (e.g. on the next journey). A maximum of 4 user profiles can be stored for mobile telephones in the telephone control system. If another mobile telephone is connected, the user profile which has not been used for the longest amount of time will be deleted automatically. Telephone control function buttons Press the PHONE infotainment button to open the PHONE main menu. Fig. 24 PHONE main menu Assignment to a user profile Telephone book data, call lists and stored speed dial buttons are assigned to a user profile and stor-
ed in the telephone control system. They are avail-
able when the mobile phone is connected with the telephone control system again. If, while connected to the radio, telephone book entries on the mobile telephone are changed, you can start a manual update of the telephone book First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 34 2 1 B A Function button: effect During a telephone call Telephone control displays and symbols Display: meaning The name of the mobile telephone network provider where the inserted SIM card or the SIM card of the paired mobile telephone is registered. Displays the telephone number or the stored name. The charge level of the paired mobile telephone. The signal strength of the current mobile telephone transmitter station. Name of the paired mobile telephone or the user profile in use. Touch to connect or pair an-
other mobile telephone. Speed dial buttons which can be used to store one telephone number from the telephone book each page 38. Opens the keypad to enter a telephone number page 36. Opens the telephone book in the paired mobile telephone page 36. Opens the call lists in the paired mobile telephone page 37. Opens the Telephone setup menu page 38. Touch to accept a call. Touch to end a call. OR: touch to reject an incoming call. Touch to mute the ring tone during a call or to switch the mute off. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Touch to make the call on the mobile telephone provision. Touch to switch off the microphone in the mobile telephone provision during a call ( func-
tion button changes to ). The conversation in the vehicle cannot be heard at the other end. appears on the display A . Touch the function button to switch on the microphone in the mobile telephone provision again. Touch to end a call. When a connection is made to a dialled telephone number, the PHONE main menu changes to the telephone call view Fig. 26. Displays and function buttons: action and effect a) First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 26 During a telephone call Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 35 B A Displays and function buttons: action and effect Entering a telephone number a) This function button is only displayed when the call is made on the mobile telephone. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Fig. 27 Entering a telephone number Possible functions Entering a telephone num-
ber In the PHONE main menu, press the function button.
: call is being made with the connected mobile telephone. Touch the function button to make the call on the mobile telephone provision.
: the microphone in the provision for mobile telephone is switched off.
: charge level of the paired mobile telephone. Display of call duration and telephone number or the stored name. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Enter the telephone number on the keypad. Touch the function button to dial the number. Enter the first letters of the required contact on the keypad. Possible en-
tries appear in the contact list. Browse through the contact list and touch the desired contact to make the call. Fig. 28 Contacts menu First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone book menu (Contacts) Selecting a contact from a list Composition Touch, Composition Colour Fig. 29 Search window 36 Call lists menu Finding a contact in the search window Selecting a contact from a list Availability of telephone book menu depends on the mobile telephone being used. The telephone book can also be opened during an on-going telephone call. In the PHONE main menu, press the function button. It may take a few minutes after the first pairing process until the telephone book data1) from the paired mobile telephone is available on the info-
tainment system. The process could take up to an hour, depending on the amount of data to be trans-
ferred. If necessary, confirm the transfer on the mobile telephone. Possible functions Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. OR: if several numbers are allocated to the same contact, first touch the contact and then the desired number to make the call. Touch the Fig. 28 function button to open the search window. Enter the name you are looking for in the search window Fig. 29. The number of matching results is displayed to the right of the entry field. Touch the function button to go to the list view. Browse through the list and touch the desired contact to make the call. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Meaning Missed calls : shows telephone numbers of missed and unanswered calls. Dialled numbers : shows telephone numbers that were dialled on the mobile telephone and the infotainment system telephone control system. Received calls : shows all telephone numbers that were received on the mobile telephone and on the infotainment system via the telephone control system. In the PHONE main menu, press the func-
tion button. Touch the ... Fig. 30 1 function button. Select the desired call list: All , Missed calls , Dialled numbers or Received calls . If a telephone number is already stored in the tele-
phone book, the stored name is displayed in the call list instead of the telephone number. Fig. 30 Call list menu Possible displays in the call menu Display Availability of call lists depends on the mobile telephone being used. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. 1) Depending on what device is used, only contacts from the telephone memory may be loaded. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 37 Speed dial buttons Assigning speed dial but-
tons Editing assigned speed di-
al buttons Fig. 31 PHONE main menu Possible functions First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. One telephone number from the telephone book can be stored to each of the speed dial buttons Fig. 31 1 . All speed dial buttons must be assigned manually and are then specific to a user profile. In the PHONE main menu, touch a free speed dial button. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. In the PHONE main menu, press and hold an assigned speed dial button until the Contacts menu opens. Select the desired contact from the list. If several telephone numbers are stored for the selected contact, select the desired number. To close the Contacts menu without applying changes, touch the func-
tion button. Any telephone number stored on a speed dial button can be deleted in the User profile setup menu page 39. In the PHONE main menu, briefly touch an assigned speed dial button to dial the telephone number stored to that button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Hands-free a): the hands-free function is activated. Touch the function button during a telephone call to make the call on the mobile telephone. Select telephone : select the mobile telephone from the list view to connect it to the infotainment system. Bluetooth : opens the Bluetooth setup menu page 39. Contacts stored to the speed dial buttons are not updated automatically. If a contact stored to a speed dial button is modified on the mobile tel-
ephone, the speed dial button must be assigned again. Telephone settings Deleting assigned speed dial buttons Dialling with speed dial buttons In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Find telephone : touch to connect a new mobile telephone. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 38 First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then Bluetooth . Bluetooth settings Function button: effect Bluetooth : touch to switch Bluetooth off. All existing connections are ended. Visibility : switch Bluetooth visibility on and off. Visible : Bluetooth visibility is activated. Not visible : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated. The Bluetooth visibility has to be switched on before a Bluetooth device can be externally paired with the infotainment system. Upon start : Bluetooth visibility is deactivated approximately 3 minutes after the engine is star-
ted. Function button: effect User profile : opens the User profile setup menu page 39. Select ring tone b): select the ring tone from the list of preset ring tones. The selected ring tone is played and stored when you leave the submenu. a) This function button is only active during a telephone call. b) Either the selected ring tone or the ring tone set in the mobile phone is sounded, depending on what mobile phone is being used. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Function button: effect Manage favourites : to edit speed dial buttons. Sort by : set the sorting order for telephone book entries (Last name or First name). Import contacts : touch to import the address book from the connected telephone or to update the previously imported address book. Delete other profiles : to delete individual or all non-active user profiles. Name : to display or edit the device name. This name is displayed to other Bluetooth devices in their Bluetooth settings. Paired devices : displays paired devices. Separating and connecting individual Bluetooth devices and Bluetooth profiles. Find devices : finds Bluetooth devices that are set to visible and are within the range of the infotainment system. The maximum range is approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : this function must be activated if you want to connect an external audio source to the infotainment system via Bluetoothpage 28. Assigned speed dial button: touch to delete the stored number. Unassigned speed dial button: touch to store a number from the address book to the speed dial button. User profile settings In the PHONE main menu, touch the Setup func-
tion button and then User profile . First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34. Telephone control (PHONE) 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 39 40 Introduction First read and observe the introductory information given on page 40. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
System settings main menu (Setup) . Press the SETUP infotainment button to open the System setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. System settings main menu (Setup) Settings Menu and system settings (SETUP) Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Function button: effect Remove the SD card safely : ejects the memory card from the system. Once the memory card has been ejec-
ted from the system the function button is greyed out. Sound : make sound and volume settings page 42. Screen : make screen settings. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Time and date : set the time and date. Language : select the desired language for text and voice output. Keypad : select the required layout (alphabetical or keyboard layout). More keypad languages : select additional keypad languages. Units : sets units of measurement for displays in the vehicle. Bluetooth : make settings relating to Bluetooth page 39. Remove safely : disconnect data storage device (USB storage device or SD card) from the system. Once the storage device has been ejected from the system the respective function button is greyed out. Display off (in 10 s) : when this function is activated, the screen switches off if no button is press-
ed on the infotainment system for about ten seconds. The screen is switched back on by touch-
ing the screen or pressing an infotainment button. Brightness : select the brightness of the screen. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Show clock in standby mode : the screen shows the current time when the infotainment system is in standby mode. Time : to set the current time. Time format : select the format for the time display (12 or 24-hour). Summer (DST) : summer time is activated. Date : set the current date. Date format : to select the format for the date display (DD.MM.YY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY). Distance, Speed, Temperature, Volume, Consumption and Pressure. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 40 ment system works properly. It is important that the correct date and time are set in the vehicle to ensure the infotain-
Function button: effect Factory settings : restoring the factory settings will erase entered data and settings depending on which option has been selected. System information : displays the system information (serial number, hardware and software versions). Copyright : copyright information. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 41 42 Introduction Sound and volume settings First read and observe the introductory information given on page 42. Changes are automatically stored when a menu is closed. The range of possible settings depends on the country, the unit and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fication. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Adjusting settings . Additional information and warnings:
Safety information for infotainment system page 3 Overview of the control elements page 6 Basic information on use page 7 Adjusting settings Press the SOUND infotainment button. OR: press the SETUP infotainment button and then select Sound to open the Sound setup main menu. To adjust the settings for a certain function, touch the appropriate function button. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Max. switch-on volume : define the maximum volume at switch-on. Announcements : to set the output volume for announcements (e.g. traffic announcements). Speed-dep. vol. (GALA) : define the scope of the speed-dependent volume control. The audio vol-
ume is automatically increased as the vehicle speed increases. Audio lower. : set how much the volume of the infotainment system should be reduced by when the ParkPilot is active. AUX volume : to set the output volume for audio sources that are connected via the AUX-IN mul-
timedia socket (Quiet, Medium or Loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources. BT audio : to set the output volume for audio sources connected via Bluetooth (quiet, medium or loud). Please also refer to page 42, Adjusting playback volume of external audio sour-
ces. Function button: effect Bass - Mid- Treble : sets the tonal quality (Bass - Mid - Treble). Balance or Balance - Fader : set the sound focus. The crosshair shows the where the sound is currently focused in the car's interior. To move the sound focus, touch the required position on the interior view or use the arrow buttons to change the position. To place the focus of sound at the centre of the interior view, touch the function button between the arrows. Volume : to make volume settings. Confirmation tone : activates the confirmation tone that sounds when a function button is touched. Adjusting playback volume of external audio sources If you need to increase the output volume of an ex-
ternal audio source, first lower the base volume on the infotainment system. If the sound from the external audio source is too quiet, increase the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Medium or Loud. Composition Touch, Composition Colour 42 If the sound from the connected external audio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source if possible. If this is not sufficient, set the input volume to Me-
dium or Quiet. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 Settings 43 AM A2DP AUX-IN AVRCP Abbreviation Definition Abbreviations DIN DRM EON FM HFP MP3 RDS TP VBR WMA Generic technology for the transmission of audio signals via Bluetooth (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile). Amplitude modulation (medium wave, MW). Auxiliary audio input. Universal technology for remote control of audio sources via Bluetooth (Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile). German Standards Authority (Deutsches Institut fr Normung). Digital rights management. Supporting of other networks (enhanced other network). Frequency modulation (very high frequency, VHF). Wireless telephony (hands-free profile). Format for compressing audio files. Radio data system. Traffic news function (traffic program). Variable bit rate. Format for compressing audio files. CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 44 Bluetooth Function buttons (soft keys) External data storage device PHONE main menu . 34 USB . 26 External audio sources . 27 Adjusting playback volume . 42 BT audio . 28 F Factory settings . 40 FM . 12, 44 Frequency band Profiles . 31 Settings . 39 Bluetooth audio . 28 Browsing lists . 9 BT audio . 28 Buttons . 8 Infotainment system . 6 AM . 12 Changing . 12 FM . 12 Selecting . 12 Function buttons . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Operating . 8 Radio main menu . 12 Index A AM . 12 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 AUX-IN . 27 AUX-IN socket . 27 External audio sources . 27 Selecting . 23 AUX-IN socket . 27 B Base volume . 8 Adjusting . 8 Muting . 8 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Cannot be read . 25 Ejecting . 25 Faulty . 25 Inserting . 25 Mode . 25 Selecting . 23 Checkboxes . 8 Control elements (infotainment system) . 6 Copyright . 20 Information . 41 Cursor . 10 D Dialling a number . 36 During a telephone call . 35 E Eject Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Infotainment buttons . 6, 7 Input window . 10 Interference from a mobile telephone . 7 Introduction . 3 K Keypad . 10 M Main menu G GALA . 42 H Hard keys . 7 Hard keys (infotainment system) . 6 I Ignition off MEDIA . 22 PHONE . 34 RADIO . 12 Settings (SETUP) . 40 Sound . 42 C Call lists . 37 CD see CD . 25 EON . 17, 44 Explosion risk areas AUX-IN socket . 27 Bit rate . 20 Telephone . 31 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 MEDIA Index 45 P PHONE O On-screen keypad . 10 Operation Bluetooth audio . 28 CD audio data . 20 CD cannot be read . 25 CD faulty . 25 CD mode . 25 Changing media source . 23 Changing tracks . 24 Copyright . 20 Displays . 22 Displays and symbols . 23 Ejecting a CD . 25 External data storage device connected to Additional display information . 11 Adjusting the volume . 8 Browsing lists . 9 Checkboxes . 8 Entries . 10 Function buttons . 8 Infotainment buttons . 7 Input window . 10 Muting . 8 On-screen keypad . 10 PHONE . 30, 34 RADIO . 12 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Scrolling . 9 Slider . 9 Switching on and off . 7 Touchscreen . 8 USB port . 26 Fast forward . 24 Fast reverse . 24 Function buttons . 22 Inserting a CD . 25 Inserting memory card . 26 Main menu . 22 Media mode . 20 Media source selection menu . 23 Memory card cannot be read . 26 MP3 files . 20 Playback modes . 22 Playing order . 21 Playlists . 21 Preparing for removal . 26 Random play (Mix) . 22 Removing memory card . 26 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements . 20 Restrictions . 21 Scan function (SCAN) . 22 Selecting storage devices . 23 Selecting track . 24 Settings . 28 Track information . 23 Track list . 24 WMA files . 20 Media sources . 23 AUX-IN . 23 CD . 23 Memory card . 23 Selecting . 23 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution A2DP . 31 Areas where special regulations apply . 31 Bluetooth profiles . 31 Bluetooth settings . 39 Call lists . 37 Connecting via infotainment system . 32 Contacts . 36 Description of functions . 31 Dialling . 36 Displays and symbols . 35 During a telephone call . 35 Entering telephone number . 36 Explosion risk areas . 31 Function buttons . 34 General information . 31 HFP . 31 Main menu . 34 Mobile telephone pairing . 32 Pairing via infotainment system . 32 Settings . 38 Speed dial buttons . 38 Telephone book . 36 Telephone control . 30 Telephone control system . 34 User profile settings . 39 Cannot be read . 26 Inserting . 26 Preparing memory card for removal . 26 Removing . 26 Selecting . 23 Muting . 8 N Numbers AUX-IN . 27 CD . 25 External data storage device (USB) . 26 MEDIA . 22 Memory card . 22 RADIO . 12 Track . 24 Dialling . 36 Composition Touch, Composition Colour Memory card Playback 46 Screen Scan function (SCAN) MEDIA . 22 RADIO . 16 see Memory card . 26 Setting date . 40 Settings Operating . 8 Screen (infotainment system) . 6 Scrolling . 9 SD card AM . 18 Bluetooth . 39 Defaults . 40 Factory settings . 40 FM . 18 Main menu . 40 Media . 28 Menu and system settings . 40 PHONE . 38 Radio . 18 Sound . 42 System . 40 User profile . 39 Volumes . 42 Setting time . 40 SETUP Pop-up windows . 8 Q Quick reference guide . 3 R RADIO . 12 AM settings . 18 Display of station names . 13 Displays and symbols . 13 EON . 17 FM settings . 18 Frequency change . 12 Function buttons . 12 Main menu . 12 Radio mode . 12 Radio text . 16 RDS . 13 Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting stations . 14 Settings . 18 Setting station frequency . 14 Setting stations . 14 Station buttons . 14 Station list . 14 Station tracking via RDS . 13 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing stations . 14 TP (traffic program) . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news . 17 Radio text (RDS) . 16 Random play (Mix) . 22 RDS . 13 Automatic station tracking . 13 Radio text . 16 RDS Regional . 13 TP (traffic program) . 17 Repeat . 22 Repeat function (Repeat) . 22 Requirements for CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Scan function (SCAN) . 16 Selecting . 14 Setting . 14 Stopping station name scrolling . 16 Storing . 14 Station search . 16 Station tracking . 13 Switch-off delay (timeout) . 7 Switching off . 7 Switching on . 7 T Telephone control Infotainment system . 8 MEDIA main menu . 22 Radio main menu . 12 Sound focus (balance, fader) . 42 Sound settings (treble, bass) . 42 Speed-dependent volume . 42 Speed dial buttons . 38 Station buttons . 14 Station names . 13 Stations CDs . 20 memory cards . 20 Rotary/push knobs . 7 Rotary/push knobs (infotainment system) . 6 S Safety information see Settings . 40 Slider . 9 Soft keys Media . 22 Radio . 16 Infotainment system . 3 see PHONE . 30 0 2
. T C R
. 6 R 5
. 2 4 1 SCAN Index 47 USB Volume User profile V VHF Telephone control system (PHONE) see FM . 44 Settings . 39 see TP (traffic program) . 17 Connecting an external data storage device . 26 Disconnecting . 26 Not readable . 26 U Unit buttons . 7 Switching off . 33 Text input . 10 Things to note AUX operation . 27 Displays . 11 Volume reduction . 7 Timeout . 7 Touchscreen (infotainment system) . 6 TP (traffic program) EON . 17 Switching on and off . 17 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Track list . 24 Traffic announcement (INFO) . 17 Traffic news Adjusting . 8 Base volume . 8 Determining for external audio sources . 42 Speed-dependent volume increase (GALA) . 42 Traffic announcements . 42 Volume distribution (balance, fader) . 42 Volume reduction . 7 CONFIDENTIAL not for distribution Composition Touch, Composition Colour 48
1 2 | Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.45 MiB | June 01 2015 / May 07 2015 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 9 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 9 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 4 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 5 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 6 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 7 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 8 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 10
<BT Module>
<BT Antenna>
Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 9
1 2 | Internal Photos 1 | Internal Photos | 1016.05 KiB | / October 09 2014 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 9 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 9 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 9 View 4 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 9 View 5 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 9 View 6 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 9 View 7 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 9 View 8 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 9 View 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 9
1 2 | Internal Photos 2 | Internal Photos | 992.82 KiB | / October 09 2014 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 10 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 10 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 10 View 4 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 10 View 5 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 10 View 6 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 10 View 7 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 10 View 8 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 10 View 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 10 View 10 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 10 / 10
1 2 | Internal Photos 3 | Internal Photos | 1.20 MiB | / October 09 2014 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 11 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 11 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 11 View 4 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 11 View 5 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 11 View 6 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 11 View 7 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 11 View 8 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 11 View 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 11 View 10 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 10 / 11 View 11 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 11 / 11
1 2 | Internal Photos 4 | Internal Photos | 905.66 KiB | / October 09 2014 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 9 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 9 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 9 View 4 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 9 View 5 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 9 View 6 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 9 View 7 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 9 View 8 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 9 View 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 9
1 2 | Internal Photos 5 | Internal Photos | 1.07 MiB | / October 09 2014 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 11 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 11 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 11 View 4 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 11 View 5 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 11 View 6 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 11 View 7 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 11 View 8 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 11 View 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 11 View 10 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 10 / 11 View 11 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 11 / 11
1 2 | Internal Photos 6 | Internal Photos | 1.02 MiB | / October 09 2014 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 10 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 10 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 10 View 4 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 10 View 5 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 10 View 6 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 10 View 7 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 10 View 8 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 10 View 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 10 View 10 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 10 / 10
1 2 | Internal Photos 7 | Internal Photos | 1.05 MiB | / October 09 2014 |
View 1 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 10 View 2 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 10 View 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 10 View 4 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 4 / 10 View 5 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 5 / 10 View 6 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 6 / 10 View 7 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 7 / 10 View 8 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 8 / 10 View 9 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 9 / 10 View 10 FCCID: BEJMIB2 Copyright 2014, Digital EMC Co., Ltd. Page 10 / 10
1 2 | External Photos | External Photos | 349.62 KiB | June 01 2015 / May 07 2015 |
FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 1 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 1 / 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 2 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 2 / 3 FCCID: BEJMIB2 View 3 Copyright 2014, DT&C Co., Ltd. Page 3 / 3
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2015-01-06 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2014-03-14 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2015-01-06
|
||||
1 2 |
2014-03-14
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
LG Electronics USA
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0020917688
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1000 Sylvan Avenue
|
||||
1 2 |
Englewood Cliffs, NJ
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
BEJ
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
MIB2
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
K****** H********
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Director, Standards & Compliance
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
201-4********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
201-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@lge.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 07/05/2015 | ||||
1 2 | 09/10/2014 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | MIB2 Entry | ||||
1 2 | MIB2 ENTRY | |||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power listed is conducted. (Date of Grant: 03/14/2014) Class II Permissive Change: This class II Permissive Change is for a PCB pattern design change. | ||||
1 2 | Power listed is conducted. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
DT&C Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
W******** L********
|
||||
1 2 |
L******** S******
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 |
l******@dtnc.net
|
|||||
1 2 |
g******@dtnc.net
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0012500 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0015790 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC